Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 8/ 4
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C
Copyright 2010 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 8/ 4
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
1) Legacy
2) Outback
Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a g lance if th at chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
1
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation list
You will find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
A/ELR
Automatic/Emergency locking
retractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AT Automatic transmission
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AWD All-wheel drive
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
FWD Front-wheel drive
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Abbreviation Meaning
HID High intensity discharge
INT Intermittent
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LED Light emitting diode
LSD Limited slip differential
MIL Malfunction indicator lamp
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
VDC
Vehicle dynamics control
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F19.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Power door lock
Power door unlock
Passengers’ windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Hazard warning flasher
Seat heater
Mark Name
Child restraint lower an-
chorages
Child restraint top tether an-
chorages
Horn
Windshield wiper
Windshield washer
Rear window wiper
Rear window washer
Lights
Tail lights, license plate light
and instrument panel illumi-
nation
Headlights
Turn signal
3
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4
Mark Name
Illumination brightness
Engine hood
Trunk lid (Legacy)
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Out-
side mirror defogger/Wind-
shield wiper deicer
Air recirculation
Mark Name
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (transmitter)
Door unlock (transmitter)
Trunk lid open (Legacy) or
rear gate unlock (Outback)
(transmitter)
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fast en their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. The SRS a irbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-38.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, in-
fants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position whenever
a child rides in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-20.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-20.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
5
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed ve-
hicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or pos-
sibly fatal injuries.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-38.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Av oid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine i s running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken dr iving is one o f the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and p ark in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
7
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durabi lity,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust t he
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-33.
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
北米Model "A2470BE-B" Edited: 2010/ 8/ 4
Black plate (12,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
10
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-7)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-28)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-48)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-32)
5) Moonroof (page 2-28)
6) Roof rail (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-4)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-35)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Fog light switch (page 3-30)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
12) Towing hook (page 9-12)
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-34)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-20)
4) Towing hook (page 9-12)
5) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-24)
7) Rear gate (page 2-26)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-52)
9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-34)
11
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
14
1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-16)/Select lever
(AT and CVT) (page 7-19)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio (page 5-1)
4) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system)
5) Multi function display (page 3-25)
6) Glove box (page 6-6)
7) Cup holder (page 6-8)
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Instrument panel
1) Door locks (page 2-4)
2) Electronic parking brake switch
(page 7-34)
3) Hill Holder switch (page 7-36)
4) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-24)
5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-31)
6) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-51)
7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-30)
8) Light control switch (page 3-27)
9) Audio control buttons (page 5-31)
10) Combination meter (page 3-5)
11) Cruise control (page 7-38)
12) Paddle shift (page 7-22)
13) Wiper control lever (page 3-31)
14) Horn (page 3-52)
15) SRS airbag (page 1-38)
16) Fuse box (page 11-46)
17) Hood lock release knob (page 11-7)
18) Power windows (page 2-20)
15
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (18,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-31)
2) Mist (page 3-32)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-33)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-34)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-33)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-32)
7) Light control switch (page 3-27)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-30)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-28)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-28)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-29)
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. models
1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Multi function display sw itching knob
(page 3-25)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-13)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
17
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
18
! Canada-spec. models
1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Multi function display sw itching knob
(page 3-25)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-13)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-10
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
3-10
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-11
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator lamp
3-12
Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Cool-
ant temperature high
warning light
3-13
Charge warning light 3-14
Oil pressure warning
light
3-14
Engine oil level warning
light
3-14
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT and CVT mod-
els)
3-15
/ ABS warning light 3-16
Mark Name Page
/
Brake system warning
light
3-17
Hill Holder indicator
light
3-19
Door open warning light 3-20
Door open indicator
light
3-20
Low fuel warning light 3-19
All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (AT and CVT
models)
3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light
3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
3-22
Security indicator light 3-22
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-23
High beam indicator
light
3-23
Mark Name Page
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
3-24
Cruise control indicator
light
3-23
Cruise control set indi-
cator light
3-23
Headlight indicator light 3-24
Low tire pressure
warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
3-15
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
light
1-46/
3-12
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
light
1-46/
3-12
Shift-up indicator 3-22
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
3-20
19
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
20
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-15
Monitoring start delay time (after closure
of doors)
0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17
Impact sensor operation (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light
illumination
ON/OFF OFF 2-15
Remote keyless entry sys-
tem
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Defogger and deicer system
for models with the automatic
climate control system
Rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes 3-34
Map light/Dome light/Cargo
area light
Operation of map light/Dome light/Cargo
area light OFF delay timer
OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2
Battery drainage prevention
function
Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-14
Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/
off headlights
Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal 3-28
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3
Power seat (if equipped) ...................................... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-6
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7
Reclining the seatback (Outback)......................... 1-8
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-10
Armrest ............................................................... 1-12
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-12
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-12
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-14
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-14
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-14
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-15
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-22
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-22
System monitors ................................................ 1-23
System servicing................................................ 1-24
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-25
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-27
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-28
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-32
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-33
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-36
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-38
Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers........................... 1-38
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-43
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-54
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-65
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-66
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-67
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (26,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers or cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is se-
curely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because c hildren are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. Consequently, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
for the child’s ag e, h eight and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-25.
& Manual seat
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
! Reclining the seatback
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects s uch as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (28,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. When operating the
reclining lever to return the seatback, hold
the seatback lightly so that it may be
raised back gradually.
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat)
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
& Power seat (if equipped)
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects s uch as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Black plate (29,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Driver’s seat
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
4) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
! Front passenger’s seat (if
equipped)
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-5
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Head restraint adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Both the driver’s seat and the front
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head r estraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Seat heater (if equipped)
1) HIGH – Rapid heating
2) LOW – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
Black plate (31,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To turn on the seat heater, press the
“LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the tempera-
ture.
Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause
the seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, slightly press
the opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Reclining the seatback (Out-
back)
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
cargo area cover when you re-
cline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover” F6-15.
Pull the lever and adjust the seatback to
the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Folding down the rear seat-
back
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property da-
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
CAUTION
The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring.
Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down.
! Legacy
To fold down the seatback, perform the
following procedure.
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-9 or “To open
the trunk lid from inside” F2-24.
1) Release lever
2. Pull the release lever on the side that
you want to fold down.
3. Fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Outback
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release
lever and then fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its origin al
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
! Rear window side seating position
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
or install the head restraint without
folding down the rear seatback. Fold
down the rear seatback and then
remove or install the head restraint.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the l owest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
A) When not used (retracted position)
B) When used (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
Armrest
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of serious
injury, passengers must never be
allowed to sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fast en their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an a ccident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. Put children in the re ar seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS ai rbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. Conse-
quently, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-25.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an ad ditional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
“Installing child restraint systems with A/
ELR seatbelt” F1-28.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
NOTE
If your seatbelt warning device does
not operate as described in the follow-
ing, it may be out of order. Have the
device inspected and, if necessary,
repaired by the nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by the warning lights in the locations
indicated in the following illustration and a
chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation th at follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch . When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For the adjusting procedure, refer
to “Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious i nternal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the release button and slide the
anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it
is locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Outback)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connec-
tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wear-
er in position in an accident, possi-
bly resulting in serious injury or
death.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot in the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard. If the belt stops before reaching
the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure
that the “
” mark on the conn ector
(tongue) and the “
” mark on the buckle
face outwards.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not on your
waist.
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a
SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor
detects a certain predetermined amount of
force during a frontal collision, the front
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
Black plate (47,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in m inor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
. The driver’s seat and passenger’s
seat pretensioners and frontal airbag
operate simultaneously.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
replaced and only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
occupants should sit in an up-
right position with their seatbelts
properly fastened. Refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the airbag system. Therefore,
if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt
pretensioner, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. The SRS
airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors [all models] and rollove r
sensors [Outback])
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand
side)
. Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand
side)
. Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
. Front door impact sensor (left-hand
side)
. Side airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (right-
hand side)
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (left-
hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbe lt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-
bag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury. Do not use elec-
trical test equipment on any
circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located in
both front fenders and the airbag
control module including the impact
sensors is located under the center
console. If you need service or
repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have the
work performed by your authorized
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehi cle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the door
pillar or specified for individual
vehicle models in this Owner’s
Manual.
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot pro-
tect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be
caught between the passenger and
objects inside the vehicle. Addition-
ally, holding a child in your lap or
arms in the front seat exposes that
child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seat-
belt and an upper anc horage (tether
anchorage) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint devices
(including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint de-
vice which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’ S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS IN JURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applic-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacture’s statement of com-
pliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
will be used.
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and side to side to check
that it is firmly secured in the center of the
seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGE R’ SSEAT.DOINGSO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR f unction of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
Black plate (55,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Legacy
Outback
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
For additional instructions, refer to “To p
tether anchorages” F1-36.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Placethelapbeltaslowas
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi-
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Legacy
Outback
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided for all the seating
positions (center and both window-side
ones) of the rear seat.
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate
the positions of the lower anchorages
(bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Peel off the anchorage cover from the
selected side of the rear seatback to
expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.
1. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connec ted, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
2. If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages),
while pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
3. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-36.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
5. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Tether anchorage location
! Legacy
Three tether anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
! Outback
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left positions, are already
installed on the rear edge of the roof.
Open the cover flap to use each ancho-
rage.
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure to
do so may prevent the top tether
from being fastened tightly.
! Legacy
1. Fold down the rear seatback for the
window side seating position. Refer to
“Folding down the rear seatback” F1-9.
2. Remove the head restraint at the
seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the seat-
belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid
placing the head restraint in the passen-
ger compartment to prevent it from being
thrown around in the passenger compart-
ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
3. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
! Outback
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1. Remove the head restraint at the
seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the seat-
belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
& Models with SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints for
driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seat-
ing position. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of six airbags.
The configurations are as follows:
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
gers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-22.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
as a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. It does not do away with the
need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
bination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protec-
tion in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
. Put children in the re ar seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS ai rbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
Consequently, we strongly re-
commend that ALL children (in-
cluding those in child seats and
those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, refer to “Child restraint
systems” F1-25.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passen-
ger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Components
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
3) SRS airbag system warning light
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
5) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
7) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
[Outback])
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-41
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Rear wheel house impact sensor (left-
hand side)
2) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
3) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
4) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
5) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
6) Center pi llar impact sensor (left-hand
side)
7) Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
8) Side airbag module (left-hand side)
9) Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side)
10) Rear wheel house impact sensor (right-
hand side)
11) Side airbag module (right-hand side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
13) Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand
side)
14) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
15) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
driver’s and front passenger’s head and
chest.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE
FRONT SE AT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the dr iver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical w hile
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be pro-
pelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system ins pected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver ’s SRS side airbag, SRS
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-
sioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the passenger’s occupant detection sys-
tem weight sensor under the seat.
Using the total seat load and seatbelt
buckle switch, the occupant detection
system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should or
should not be inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system from
functioning correctly or cause the system
to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
senger’s seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
. The front passenger’s seat must not be
used with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any articles on the front
passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue
and buckle engaged when you leave your
vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle i nspected at your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dash-
board.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illumin ated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a forward
facing child restraint system and a small
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING
that follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a booster
seat and a small child is in the booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
load for a time exceeding the predeter-
mined monitoring time period.
. The seat is occupied by a child who
has outgrown a child restraint system
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a
small adult.
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely injured should the fro nt
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
ploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by a child, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may increase
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbag even though that seat is
occupied by a child.
. Do not place any article on the seat
other than the child occupant and a child
restraint system.
. Do not place more than one child on
the seat.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when
an infant or a small child is in a child
restraint system (including booster
seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK ”
position if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when an
infant or a small child is in a child restraint
system (including booster seat). Remove
the child restraint system from the seat. By
referring to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s recommendations as well as the
child restraint system installation proce-
dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-25,
correctly install the child restraint system.
Turn the igni tion swi tch to t he “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking rele vant cor rectiv e actio ns de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer fo r an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while
the OFF indicator turns off), take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions is met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult.
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
from behind and under the seat. This may
lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
pillar, door or center console box. This
may lift the seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator turns off even when the
front passenger’s seat is occupied
by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK ”
position. Ask the front passenger to set
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
indicator remains illuminated while the ON
indicator remains off, take the following
actions.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
. Ensure that there is no article, book,
shoe, or other object trapped under the
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side
of the seat.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON
indicator should illuminate while the OFF
indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! Effect vehicle modifications made
for persons with disabilities may
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination me-
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the SUBARU advanced air-
bag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
distributors:
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
! Operation
1) Driver’s side
2) Passenger’s side
The SRS airbag can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenge r ’ s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front
fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger ’s modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending
on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat in the case of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of
the SRS airbag after deployment is short-
er than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be releas ed. Thes e
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. It is basically not designed
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
cause the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are basically not designed to deploy in
side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Examples of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-
ploy.
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will basically not deploy.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed basically not
to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the
side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
WARNING
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin i s stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
located at the top of each center pillar.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In the event of a rollover, for Outback
models, the SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and sup-
plement the seatbelt by reducing the
impact to the occupant’s head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed as only
a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt. They
do not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. It is also important
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid
injuries that can result when an
occupant is not seated in a proper
upright position.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
theforceofSRSsideairbag
deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms and hands out of the win-
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on
each side of the cabin is stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear
seat), and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact. For Outback mod-
els, the SRS curtain airbags also
deploy in the event of a rollover.
However, the force of its deploy-
ment may cause injuries if your
head is too close to it.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or wrap his/her
arms around the front seat seat-
back. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS side airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head
or arms or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
aged 12 and under should be
placed in the rear seat anyway
and should be properly re-
strained at all times.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
any passenger’s seat facing the
side window or put their head,
arms or hands out of the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of the SRS curtain airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head is
close to the SRS curtain airbag.
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of the SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dan gerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free micro phone or
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
front seat’s occupant.
! Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
deploy independently of each other be-
cause each has its own impact sensor.
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dently of the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering
wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. In the airbag control module
For Outback models, a rollover sensor is
also located inside the airbag control
module.
If the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module and one of the
center pillar impact sensors or front door
impact sensors together sense an impact
force above a predetermined level in a
side collision, the control module causes
both the SRS side airbag and curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate
regardless of whether the rear wheel
house impact sensor on the same side
senses an impact.
If the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module and one of the rear
wheel house impact sensors together
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
For Outback models, if the rollover sensor
detects rollover of the vehicle, the control
module inflates the SRS curtain airbags.
At this time, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seatbelt pretensioners also operate
at the same time.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SR S side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the rear
seat). Doing so can cause burns
beca use the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. They are
basica lly not designed to deploy in a
lesser side impact.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger com-
partment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision
to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
For Outback models, the SRS curtain
airbags are also designed to deploy when
the vehicle is in an extremely inclined
state such as during a rollover. They are
basica lly not designed to deploy in a
lesser inclined state.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag ar e basical ly not designed to
deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment would not help the
occupant in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will most
likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS curtain airbag will
most likely deploy.
Legacy models
A severe side impact near the front seat or
the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Outback models
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
Black plate (85,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Outback).
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (86,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (87,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely
to deploy.
Legacy models
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (88,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Outback models
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (89,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag will basically not
deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are basically not designed
to deploy.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front s eatbelt pretensi oners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (90,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors [all models] and rollove r
sensors [Outback])
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand
side)
. Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand
side)
. Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
. Front door impact sensor (left-hand
side)
. Side airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (right-
hand side)
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (left-
hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbe lt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no u ser-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult y our
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
Black plate (91,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’ssideandnearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the s ystem
inoperative, which may r esult in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes the following modifi-
cations.
. Installation of custom steering
wheels
. Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat
. Attachment of a hands-free mi-
crophone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
window, an assist grip, or any
other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-67
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (92,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Installation of additional electri-
cal/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag s ystem
components and/or wiring
. Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the purpose
of a speaker replacement or
sound insulation
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equi pment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU acces-
sory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2
Key number ........................................................ 2-2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6
Power door locking switches............................. 2-7
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9
Unlocking the doors............................................ 2-9
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)............................. 2-9
Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)....................... 2-10
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11
Replacing lost transmitters................................. 2-12
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-15
System alarm operation...................................... 2-15
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-16
Arming the system ............................................ 2-16
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Passive arming.................................................. 2-18
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-20
Windows............................................................. 2-20
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-21
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-23
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-23
Trunk lid (Legacy).............................................. 2-24
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-24
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-24
Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-25
Rear gate (Outback)........................................... 2-26
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-28
Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-28
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-29
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
. Trunk lid (Legacy)
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the trunk
and glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
To make replacement keys, the security ID
is also needed. Refer to “Key replace-
ment” F2-4.
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unau thorized person f rom
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
switch and can be turned to the “START”
position, the engine will automatically stop
after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
position, the transponder transmits the
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost in-
stantly, the immobilizer system does not
impede normal starting of the engine.
If the engine does not start, pull out the
key once before trying again. Refer to
“Ignition switch” F3-3.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
NOTE
To protect your vehi cle from th eft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and lock the doors (all mod-
els) and rear gate (Outback).
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
& Security ID plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security
ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle.
This number is needed to make a replace-
ment key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
To make replacement keys, the key
number is also needed. Refer to “Key
replacement” F2-4.
The security ID is also n eeded for
Keys and doors 2-3
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-4 Keys and doors
replacement or repair of the engine control
unit, integrated unit, combination meter
(all models) and security control unit
(Canada-spec. models).
& Security indicator light
The security indicator light deters potential
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
equipped with an immobilizer system. It
begins flashing approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out.
If the security indicator light does not flash,
the immobilizer system may be malfunc-
tioning. If this occurs, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
an imitation key), the security indicator
light illuminates.
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
have their ID codes erase d and re-
registered when a new key is made.
Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
be presented when a new key is regis-
tered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
after the other keys are re-registered. For
information on replacement keys and on
the registration of keys with your immo-
bilizer system, c ontact your SUBARU
dealer.
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Black plate (99,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Locking without the key
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door.
Locking without the key
1) Press the front side of the power door
locking switch.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, press the front
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate (Outback) are
locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a door
from being accidentally opened, and
intruders from unexpectedly open-
ing doors and entering your vehicle.
Keys and doors 2-5
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (100,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-6 Keys and doors
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
from th e inside, rotate the lock lever
forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
starting to drive.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion to prevent the battery from going
dead. The following interior lights are
affected by this function.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights OFF
*1
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome
lights
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Door step
lights
— None
*2
Cargo area
light
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the
battery drainage prevention function only when
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
light” F6-2
.
*2: The door step lights are not affected by the
battery drainage prevention function, so the
lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off
the lights, it is necessary that each door is
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer if you would like to
change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When lea ving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Black plate (101,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door
locking switches located at the driver’s
side and the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
Keys and doors 2-7
2
Black plate (102,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-8 Keys and doors
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter i s pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measur es to pre vent t he
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
. FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications no t
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of I C
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The transmitter for the remote keyless
entry system is located inside the key
head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate (Outback)) without a key
. Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-15.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on envi ronmental
conditions. The system’s operable dis-
tance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system does
not operate when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button
: Unlock/disarm button
: Lock/arm button
A: Panic button
Black plate (103,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Locking the doors
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
rear gate (Outback). An electronic chirp
will sound once and the turn signal lights
will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
will sound five times and the turn signal
lights will flash five times to alert you that
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are
not properly closed. When you close the
door, it will automatically lock and then an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
turn signal lights will flash once.
& Unlocking the doors
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate
(Outback), briefly press the “
” button a
second time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
& Opening the trunk lid
(Legacy)
The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button
is pressed continuously for at least 2
seconds. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the turn signal lights will flash
twice.
Keys and doors 2-9
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-10 Keys and doors
& Unlocking the rear gate
(Outback)
Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehi cle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “
”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “
” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the turn signal
lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
To deactivate the audible signal, perform
the following procedure. You can also use
the same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
4. While holding down the unlock side of
the power door locking switch, pull the key
out and re-insert it into the ignition switch
at least 5 times within 10 seconds after
performing step 2.
5. Open and close the driver’s door
within 10 seconds after performing step 4.
6. To indicate completion of the setting,
the turn signal lights flash 3 times and the
chirp sounds 3 times.
You may have the above procedure
performed by your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Replacing the battery
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
cing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; chil dren could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
If the transmitter fails to operate when
used within the standard distance, this
may indicate a weak battery. Replace the
battery as soon as possible. The battery
can be replaced by your authorized
SUBARU dealer. If you replace the battery
by yourself, use utmost care that no dust,
oil or water enters the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw on the key head.
2. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
4. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
Keys and doors 2-11
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-12 Keys and doors
1) Negative (−) side facing up
5. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)
making sure to install the new battery with
the negative (−) side facing up.
6. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
7. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
8. Reinstall the screw on the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secur-
ity reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The remote keyless entry system is
equipped with a special code learning
feature that allows you to program new
transmitter codes into the system or to
delete old ones. The system can learn up
to four unique transmitter codes. The four
transmitter codes may be the same or
different.
Programming transmitter codes into
system:
Key unit tag
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the
remote keyless entry system, it is neces-
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
sary to program the transmitter’s code
(identification number) into the system. A
tag showing the code is affixed to the key
unit, and another is affixed to the circuit
board inside the transmitter. If there is no
tag, open the transmitter case and make a
note of the eight-digit number. Program
the number into the system in accordance
with the following procedure.
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate (Outback) or trunk lid (Legacy).
2. Open the driver ’s door, sit in the
driver’s seat, and close the door.
3. Perform the following steps within 45
seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
once.
1) LOCK
2) ON
(2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. An electronic tone will not
sound. In this event, perform the whole
procedure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will
sound for 30 seconds.
. If you do not perform the operations
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error
will occur and the electronic tone will
not sound. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with
part 3 of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, press the lock side of the power
door lock switch the same number of
times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-
ter code. For example, press the lock
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
the code is 8.
Keys and doors 2-13
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-14 Keys and doors
NOTE
. The electronic tone will stop sound-
ing when you start entering the num-
ber.
. If you do not start entering the
number using the lock switch before
the electronic tone stops sounding, an
error will occur. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning
with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one press of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, press the unlock side of the lock
switch within 5 seconds.
NOTE
. An electronic tone will sound.
. If you press the unlock side of the
lock switch when more than 5 seconds
have passed, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
for each of the remaining digits of the
transmitter code beginning with the sec-
ond digit (counting from the left) and
finishing with the eighth digit.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one press of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, use the power door lock switch
to reenter the transmitter code beginning
with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number
using the lock switch before the elec-
tronic tone stops sounding, an error
will occur. In this event, perform the
procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the
code a second time, an electronic tone will
sound for 1 second to indicate completion
of registration, provided the code entered
the second time is identical to that entered
the first time.
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is
not identical to the code entered the
first time, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another trans-
mitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure begin-
ning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary trans-
mitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the remote keyless
entry system has four memory locations to
store transmitter codes, giving it the ability
to operate with up to four transmitters.
When you lose a transmitter, the lost
transmitter’s code remains in the memory.
For security reasons, lost transmitter
codes should be deleted from the mem-
ory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
twice. If you have three current transmit-
ters, program two of them once and the
third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the
system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating
their remote keyless entry system with-
in range of your vehicle when program-
ming transmitters. If someone el se
were to operate their remote transmit-
ter while you are programming your
transmitters, it is possible that their
transmitter code will be programmed
into your system, allowing them un-
authorized access to your vehicle.
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if
someone attempts to b reak into your
vehicle.
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System alarm operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered:
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid)
remains open after the 30-second period,
the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
Keys and doors 2-15
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-16 Keys and doors
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk
lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models wi th shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
illumination of map lights and dome
light. The map lights and dome light
notification is deactivated as the fac-
tory setting. Refer to “Function set-
tings” F20. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-18.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate (Outback)).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows:
If the system was previously activated:
The trip meter screen displays “AL oF”
and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
the system is now deactivated.
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The trip meter screen displays “AL on” and
the horn sounds once, indicating that the
system is now activated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote trans-
mitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
& Arming the system
! To arm the system using remote
transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate
(Outback)).
: Press to Arm the system.
: Press to Disarm the system.
Black plate (111,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights
will flash once, and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator l ight will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the turn signal lights flash five
times to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate) are not properly closed. When
you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automa-
tically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switch
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate
(Outback)) but leave only the driver’s door
or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
once and the security indicator light will
start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing
for 30 seconds (standby time), the security
indicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are open. Always make sure
that they are fully closed before arming
the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If your vehicle is a Legacy and you
open the trunk using the remote trans-
mitter’s “
” button with the alarm
system armed, the system will be
temporarily placed in a standby state.
The system will go back to the surveil-
lance state upon locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby mode
for a 30-second period after locking the
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
Keys and doors 2-17
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (112,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-18 Keys and doors
– Doors are unlocked using the
remote transmitter.
– Any door (including the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk (Legacy)) is
opened.
– Ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
& Disarming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
lights will flash twice and the security
indicator light will turn off.
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate
(Outback), briefly press the “
” button a
second time within 5 seconds.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the
“ON” position with a registered key.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (Outback) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
16. The security indicator light will con-
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-16.
& Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) LOCK
2) ON
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system wi ll
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power door
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard-
less of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
“
” button on the transmitter.
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” positi on, the indicator l ight wil l
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
. When a door or rear gate (Outback)
was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
a strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration like those shown in the follow-
ing and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Examples:
– Vibration from construction site
– Vibration in multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors 2-19
2
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-20 Keys and doors
Child safety locks
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
prevents the door from being opened even
if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cann ot be
opened from inside regardless of the
position of the inner door handle lock
lever. The door can only be opened from
the outside.
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the power window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Black plate (115,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Power window operation by
driver
! Driver’s side power window
switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left passenger’s window
5) For rear right passenger’s window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
! Operating the driver ’s window
1) Automatically open/close
2) Open/close
To open:
Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch.
Press the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
For some models, this switch also has a
one-touch auto up function that allows the
window to be closed fully without holding
the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window h alfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function is deactivated. Initi-
alize the power window to reactivate
the one-touch auto up/down function.
Refer to “Initialization of power win-
dow” F2-23.
! Anti-entrapment function
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this func-
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (116,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-22 Keys and doors
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact simi-
lar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encoun-
ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
fer to “Initialization of power window”
F2-23.
While closing automatically, if the window
senses a substantial enough object
trapped between the window and the
window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
! Operating the passengers’ win-
dows
To open:
Press the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reac hes the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
closed.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
Black plate (117,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Power window operation by
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
Each passenger window can be controlled
by the power window switch located on
the door.
! Operating the windows
To open:
Press the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cl uster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
& Initialization of power win-
dow
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window in the following
procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pushing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
Keys and doors 2-23
2
Black plate (118,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-24 Keys and doors
Trunk lid (Legacy)
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-9.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
. Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. Even when the trunk lid cannot be
opened using the remote keyless entry
system, you can open the trunk lid by
using th e k ey. Refer to “Trunk lid
(Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
opened” F9-18.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
Press the trunk lid opener switch for more
than 1 second.
! To lock and unlock the trunk lid
opener switch
When you entrust your vehicle key to
another person, you can lock the trunk lid
opener switch to prevent items in the trunk
from being stolen.
To lock the trunk lid opener switch, per-
form the following procedure.
1. Open the glove box. Refer to “Glove
box” F6-6.
2. Press the trunk lid opener lock button.
To unlock the trunk lid opener switch,
perform the same procedure again.
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the hand le. Thi s ope ration
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for app roximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
click.
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-26 Keys and doors
This places the latch in the locked posi-
tion.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (Outback)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches ” F2-7.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-8.
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
the rear gate opener button.
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas fro m entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate (Out-
back) – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked” F9-19.
Keys and doors 2-27
2
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2-28 Keys and doors
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’shands,arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
conform to the following instruc-
tions without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Moonroof switches
! Tilting moonroof
1) Raise
2) Lower
The raising function will only operate when
the moonroof is fully closed. The lowering
function will only operate when the moon-
roof is raised.
Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to raise the moonroof.
Press the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com-
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
1) Open
2) Close
Press the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch rear-
ward to open the moonroof. The sun
shade will also be opened together with
the moonroof. For Outback, the moonroof
will stop at a position approximately 0.8 in
(2 cm) away from the fully opened posi-
tion. Press the switch again to open the
moonroof completely.
Press the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch forward
to close the moonroof.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily press the switch to the
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
. If the moonroof cannot be closed
through the switch operation because
of system failure, it can be cl osed
manually using a hex-head wrench.
For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof
– if moonroof cannot be closed” F9-19.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Keys and doors 2-29
2
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3
Acc ..................................................................... 3-4
ON ...................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4
Ignition switch light............................................. 3-4
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-5
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6
Odometer............................................................ 3-6
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-6
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-7
ECO gauge ......................................................... 3-8
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators......................................................... 3-12
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp .................................................. 3-12
Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
temperature high warning light ......................... 3-13
Charge warning light .......................................... 3-14
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-14
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-14
AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and CVT
models) ........................................................... 3-15
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-15
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-16
Brake system warning light................................ 3-17
Hill Holder indicator light ................................... 3-19
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-19
Door open warning light .................................... 3-20
Door open indicator light ................................... 3-20
Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-20
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and CVT
models) ........................................................... 3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-22
Security indicator light....................................... 3-22
Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 3-22
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-23
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-23
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-23
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-23
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-24
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped).......... 3-24
Clock .................................................................. 3-24
Multi function display ........................................ 3-25
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-25
Average fuel consumption ................................. 3-26
Current fuel consumption .................................. 3-26
Driving range on remaining fuel ......................... 3-27
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Instruments and controls
Light control switch ........................................... 3-27
Headlights.......................................................... 3-28
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-28
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-29
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-29
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-29
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-30
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-30
Wiper and washer .............................................. 3-31
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-32
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Outback) ......................................................... 3-34
Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-34
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-36
Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-36
Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-36
Auto-dimming mirror with compass
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-44
Auto-dimming mirror with compass and
HomeLink
®
(if equipped)................................... 3-45
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-51
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-52
Horn.................................................................... 3-52
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Ignition switch
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
while turning it (all models) and the select
lever is in the “P” position (AT and CVT
models).
Instruments and controls 3-3
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-4 Instruments and controls
& Acc
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
If the engine does not start with your
registered key, pull out the key once (at
this time, the security indicator light will
blink), wait for at l east 10 seconds,
reinsert the key in the ignition switch and
then try to start the engine again.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch.
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
under the following conditions.
. When the driver’s door is closed
. When the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light gradually turns off under the
following conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position
. When the doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
press the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles, odometer and
trip meter back light illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MAX position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MIN position.
4. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
NOTE
The above sequence of operations may
not take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position.
2. Press the trip knob to show “
” or
“
” on the trip meter display.
Instruments and controls 3-5
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (130,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-6 Instruments and controls
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*
1
: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*
2
: MT models only
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles
has been set for activation “
” at
the time of shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to change the initial
movement setting of the meter/gauge
needles when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. Change the setting
whentheignitionswitchisinthe
“LOCK” or “Acc” position.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you
do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
& Double trip meter
1) Trip knob
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
Black plate (131,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*
1
: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*
2
: MT models only
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
and keep the knob pressed for more than
2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for
AT and CVT models) or the shift lever is
in the neutral position (for MT models),
the engine is controlled so that the
engine speed may not become too high
even if the accelerator pedal is pressed
hard.
& Fuel gauge
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (132,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-8 Instruments and controls
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the fuel gauge’s dial will light up and the
needle will indicate the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the
“E” position and the dial and needle will
turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the fuel tank is nearly empty. It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. When this light illuminates,
fill the fuel tank immediately.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
NOTE
. The low fuel warning light illumi-
nates when the remaining amount of
fuel in the tank has reached approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).
. The low fuel warning light does not
turn off unless the tank is replenished
up to a fuel quantity of approximately
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
& ECO gauge
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption and the current rate of fuel
consumption. Using the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset, the indicator needle behaves as
described in the following items.
U.S.-spec. models:
If the current rate of fuel consumption is
lower tha n the average ra te of fuel
consumption, the indicator needle points
to the “+” side. If the current rate of fuel
consumption is higher than the average
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator
needle points to the “−” side. When the
Black plate (133,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
indicator needle is pointing to the “+” side,
it indicates fuel-efficient driving.
Except U.S.-spec. models:
If the current rate of fuel consumption is
lower than the avera ge rate of fuel
consumption, the indicator needle points
to the “−” side. If the current rate of fuel
consumption is higher than the average
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator
needle points to the “+” side. When the
indicator needle is pointing to the “−” side,
it indicates fuel-efficient driving.
NOTE
. The E CO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits check-
ing the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. The
following lights illuminate:
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON /
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator lamp
: Coolant temperature high warning light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: Engine low oil level warning light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(AT and CVT models)
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Hill Holder indicator light
: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and
CVT models)
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
: Low fuel warning light
: Door open warning light
: Door open indicator light
: Cruise control indicator light
: Cruise control set indicator light
: Select lever/gear position indicator
Instruments and controls 3-9
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (134,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-10 Instruments and controls
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by the warning lights in the locations
indicated in the following illustration and a
chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch . When the ignition sw itch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no pas senger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
Black plate (135,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-
belt pretensioners are in normal operation.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbe lt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which m ay in-
crease the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Instruments and controls 3-11
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-12 Instruments and controls
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dash-
board.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction
indicator lamp
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator lamp illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that th ere is a problem or pote ntial
problem somewhere in the emission con-
trol system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system mal-
function has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
warning light/malfunction indicator lamp
turn off immediately. It may take several
driving trips. If the light does not turn off,
take your vehicle to y our authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should conform
to the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a t railer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator lamp may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driv-
ing trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU deal-
er immediately.
& Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Cool-
ant temperature high
warning light
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, if this
indicator light/warning light be-
haves under any of the following
conditions, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact
your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
– It remains blinking in RED.
– It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
. While driving, if thi s indicator
light/warning light behaves under
any of the following conditions,
take the specified appropriate
measure listed below.
– Blinking in RED:
Decelerate the vehicle. After
the blinking RED light turns
off, you can drive the vehicle
normally.
– Illuminated in RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as
soon as possible, and refer
to the emergency steps for the
case of engine overheating.
After that, have the system
checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
gine overheating” F9-12.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
This coola nt temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
cient warming up of the engine
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
ing condition of the engine
For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for
approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
After that, this indicator light/warning light
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
Instruments and controls 3-13
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-14 Instruments and controls
turns off when the engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light bli nks in
RED. At this time, decelerate the vehicle.
After the blinking RED light turns off, you
can drive the vehicle normally. However, if
the indicator light/warning light often blinks
in RED, the electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases further, the indicator light/warning
light illuminates in RED continuously. At
this time, the engine may be overheating.
Safely stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, and refer to the emergen cy
steps for the case of engine overheating.
Refer to “Engine ove rheating” F9-12.
After that, have the system checked by
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off
after a short time.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Engine low oil level
warning light
The engine low oil level warning light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
after approximately 2 seconds.
This light also illuminates when the engine
oil level decreases to the lower limit. The
illuminating conditions and remaining oil
level are shown in the following items.
2.5 L models:
. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position but the engine is not running:
approximately 1.9 US qt (1.8 liters, 1.6
Imp qt)
. while the engine is running: approxi-
mately 3.2 US qt (3.0 liters, 2.6 Imp qt)
3.6 L models:
. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position but the engine is not running:
approximately 4.0 US qt (3.8 liters, 3.3
Imp qt)
. while the engine is running: approxi-
mately 5.6 US qt (5.3 liters, 4.7 Imp qt)
If the engine low oil level warning light
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
at a safe and level location, and then
check the engine oil level. Wh en the
engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil if necessary.
Refer to “Engine oil” F11-12.
If the warning light does not turn off after
refilling with engine oil or the warning light
illuminates even though the engine oil
level is within the normal range, have the
system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. The engine low oil level warning
light will not turn off immediately even
if you replace or add engine oil. It will
turn off only when the vehicle is idling
and the engine is warmed up comple-
tely.
. When the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope, the
warning light may illuminate tempora-
rily due to the movement of engine oil
in the engine.
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT and CVT mod-
els)
The AT oil temperature warning light “AT
OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-spec.
models)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label , yo u sho uld d eterm ine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for pr oper tire ma intenance,
and it is the driver ’s responsibil ity to
maintain co rrect tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
Instruments and controls 3-15
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-16 Instruments and controls
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Alw ays check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tir es or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
position and turns off after approximately 2
seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
when the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds approximately 12 km/h
(8 mph).
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
– The warning light flashes.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
. When the warning light is flash-
ing, the ABS system may be
malfunctioning. However, t he
conventional brake system con-
tinues to operate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
gether with the brake system warning light
if the EBD sy stem malfuncti ons. For
further details of the EBD system mal-
function warning, refer to “Brake system
warning light” F3-17.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS system may be considered
normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light r emains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
. If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
Instruments and controls 3-17
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-18 Instruments and controls
er. For details, refer to “Electro-
nic parking brake” F7-34.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position with the electronic
parking brake applied, the brake sys-
tem warning light remains illuminated
for approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pressed to apply the electro-
nic parking brake while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
brake system warning light illuminates,
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. Even if the brake system warning
light flashes, if the warning light beha-
vior is as described in the following
examples, the electronic parking brake
system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
flash immediately after the engine is
started. However, it is not malfunction-
ing if the warning light turns off after
theelectronicparkingbrakeisre-
leased.
. The brake system warning light may
flash after the electronic parking brake
is frequently applied and released.
However, the electronic parking brake
system is not malfunctioning if the light
turns off for a short period of time.
This light has the following functions:
! Parking brake warning
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake released and with the ignition switch
positioned in “ON”), it could be an indica-
tion of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake
pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe place and
check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level
is below the “MIN” mark in the reservoir,
do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle
towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for
repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning l ight illuminate simultan eously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-28.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive c arefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
The brake system warning light flashes
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light
flashes, promptly park in a safe location
as soon as possible and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pulled. For details, refer to
“Electronic parking brake” F7-34.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warning
The brake system warning light flashes for
10 seconds and a chirp sound will be
heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
The brake system warning light flashes for
20 seconds and a chirp sound will be
heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the warning light turns off.
! Emergency released warning
The brake system warning light flashes
when the parking brake is automatically
released in case of an emergency.
& Hill Holder indicator
light
WARNING
If the Hill Holder indicator light does
not illuminate even when the Hill
Holder switch is pressed to activate
the Hill Holder function, the electro-
nic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The light illuminates when the igni tion
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
switch is pressed to activate the Hill
Holder function.
& Low fuel warning
light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
Instruments and controls 3-19
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-20 Instruments and controls
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door open warning
light
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the door open warning light
illuminates for approximately 2 seconds
and then turns off.
The door open warning light illuminates if
any door, the rear gate (Outback) or trunk
lid (Legacy) is not ful ly cl osed. This
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position or
thekeyisremovedfromtheignition
switch.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& Door open indicator
light
When any of the doors, the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
fully closed, the door open indicator light
illuminates. This function is effective even
if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“Acc” position or the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open warning
light.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
& All-Wheel Drive
warning light (AT and
CVT models)
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe place then check whether
all four tires are the same diameter
and whether any of the tires has a
puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and turns off after the
engine has started.
! For AT models
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure exces-
sively low in any of its tires.
! For CVT models
This light illuminates when All-Wheel
Drive is disengaged and the drive me-
chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
for maintenance or similar purposes.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure exces-
sively low in any of its tires.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light
The light illuminates when the igni tion
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off several seconds after the engine
has started. This lighting pattern indicates
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
is operating normally.
Black plate (145,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS systems are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator lamp is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
Instruments and controls 3-21
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (146,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-22 Instruments and controls
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
The light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Security indicator light
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2-
15.
! Immobilizer system
This light blinks approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
indicate that immobilizer system may be
malfunctioning . Contac t your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates.
& Select lever/gear position in-
dicator
1) Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and CVT
models)
This indicator shows the position of the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
and CVT models).
! Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and
CVT models)
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission” F7-18.
Black plate (147,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Gear position indicator setting (MT
models)
The gear position indicator light can be
activated or deactivated by performing the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
2. Press the trip knob to show “
” or
“
” on the trip meter display.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
*
1
: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*
2
: MT models only
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. The initial setting for your vehicle of
the gear position indicator has been set
for activat ion “
” atthetimeof
shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to change the
setting of the gear position indicator
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. Change the setting when the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“Acc” position.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-48.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indica-
tor light
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and turns off after
approximately 3 seconds.
This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed.
NOTE
. If you press the main switch button
while turning the ignition switch “ON”,
the cruise control function is deacti-
vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Cruise control set in-
dicator light
The cruise control set indicator light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
Instruments and controls 3-23
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (148,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-24 Instruments and controls
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.
& Headlight indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is turned to the
“
” or “ ” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
Clock
NOTE
Your SUBARU dealer can change the
settings of activating/deactivating the
automatic adjustment of the clock by
the GPS (Global Positioning System)
(for models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system). Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
The clock shows t he time while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the “+” button or the “−” button. If
you press the “+” button, the indicated
time will change in one-minute incre-
ments. If you press the “−” button, the
indicated time will change in one-minute
decrements. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.
Black plate (149,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Multi function display
1) Multi function display switching knob
With the ignition switch in the “ ON”
position, each successive press of the
multi functi on display switching knob
toggles the display in the following se-
quence.
& Outside temperature indica-
tor
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idli ng; while ru nning at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
! Road surface freeze warning indi-
cation
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
378F(38C) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
Instruments and controls 3-25
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-26 Instruments and controls
an indicati on other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indication does not
flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Average fuel consumption
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-
tion between the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding a verage fue l
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual va lues and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter indica-
tion is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
& Current fuel consumption
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
consumption at the present moment.
& Driving range on remaining
fuel
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance
that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.
When the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates, the driving range indication flashes
for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
ately.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Light control switch
The light contr ol switch only operates
when the key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
. Even if the key is removed from the
ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
minated by operating the light control
switch position from “OFF” to “
”
and/or “
”.
. If the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are illuminated and the key is
removed from the ignition switch, the
chirp sound informs the driver that the
lights are illuminated.
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the “OFF” position. If
the vehicle is left unattended for
Instruments and controls 3-27
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-28 Instruments and controls
a long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than “OFF”, the battery may be
discharged.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
first position
Instrument panel illumination, tail lights,
front side marker lights and license plate
lights are on.
second position
Headlights, instrument panel illumination,
front side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are on.
: Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the headlights, instrument panel
illumination, front side marker lights, tail
lights and license plate lights are auto-
matically on or off depending on the level
of the ambient light.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change
(dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the detent position.
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
“OFF” position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& Daytime running light system
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “
”
position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights do not turn
on automatically.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position (AT and CVT mod-
els).
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the front side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are
illuminated.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Instruments and controls 3-29
3
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-30 Instruments and controls
Illumination brightness con-
trol
The illumination brightness of the clock
display, audio, air conditioner, multi func-
tion display and meter/gauge dims under
the following conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “
” or
“
” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumina tion brigh tness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
Front fog light switch
(if equipped)
The front fog lights operate under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “
”
position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights turn on auto-
matically
However, the front fog lights turn off when
the headlights are switched to high beam.
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
fog light switch on the turn signal lever
upward to the “
” position. To turn off the
front fog lights, turn the switch back down
to the “OFF” position.
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
The indicator light located on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise t he washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshiel d or rear
window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper mo-
tor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, wiper deicer (if
equipped) or rear window defog-
ger before turning on the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper op-
eration.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer
Instruments and controls 3-31
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-32 Instruments and controls
fluid” F11-40.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause d eterioration of th e
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The front wiper motor is protected
against overloads by a circuit breaker.
If the mot or op erates con tinuousl y
under an unusually heavy load, the
circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait f or approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button
depressed at least for 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blades results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
F11-41.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
MIST : Mist (for a single wipe)
OFF : Off
INT: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “INT”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in five steps from
the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
tank refilling method, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-40.
Instruments and controls 3-33
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-34 Instruments and controls
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch (Outback)
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
ON: Continuous
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Off
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT”
position, the rear wiper will operate inter-
mittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed.
When you subsequently move the select
lever to the “R” position (AT and CVT
models) or the shift lever to the reverse
position (MT models), the rear wiper will
switch to continuous operation. When you
move the select lever/shift lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever downward to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
and the wiper operates until you release
the knob.
Defogger and deicer
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with a rear
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
window defogger. Some models are also
equipped with an outside mirror defogger
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de-
fogger and deicer system is activated only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Manual climate control system
Automatic climate control system
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
acti vated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blades have been deiced
completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, i t is possible for a
SUBARU dealer to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous opera-
tion mode. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
Instruments and controls 3-35
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-36 Instruments and controls
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9mph(15km/h)orlowerfor15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer
automatically stops operating, though
the rear window defogger and outside
mirror defogger maintain continuous
operation in this condition.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continu-
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Type A inside mirror (if
equipped)
The mirror has a day and night position.
Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you for the night position. Push it
away for the day position . The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
& Type B inside mirror (if
equipped)
1) Electronic compass display
2) Rear view image display
3) HomeLink
®
button 1
4) HomeLink
®
button 2
5) Function indicator
6) HomeLink
®
button 3
7) Photosensor
8) Power button
9) Compass button
The mirror has the following features.
. Auto-dimming function for anti-glare
capability
. Rear view image display
. Electronic compass display
. HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
Using the power button and compass
Black plate (161,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
button, you can display the various func-
tions of the rear view image display and
the electronic compass display based on
how long you press the buttons.
Power button
Gear
position
Period of
time button
is pressed
Function
displayed
Except
R (reverse)
Briefly
Auto-dimming
function ON/OFF*
R (reverse) Briefly
Rear view image
display: ON/OFF*
mode
6to12
seconds
Enter the lan-
guage selection
mode
12 to 15
seconds
Rear view image
display: opera-
tional/non-opera-
tional mode
*: The setting returns to “ON” as a default
setting every time the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
Compass button
Gear
position
Period of
time button
is pressed
Function
displayed
Except
R (reverse)
Briefly
Electronic com-
pass display ON/
OFF
3to6
seconds
Enter the com-
pass zone setting
mode
6to9
seconds
Enter the com-
pass calibration
mode
! Auto-dimming function
The auto-dimming function is an anti-glare
capability which automatically red uces
glare coming from headlights of vehicles
behind you.
By pressing the power button, the auto-
dimming function is toggled on or off.
When the auto-dimming function is on, the
function indicator will illuminate in green.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into the “R” (re-
verse) position. This is to ensure good
rearward visibility during reversing.
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
NOTE
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar item dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror surface.
By doing so, the sprayed glass cleaner
could enter the inside of the mirror
Instruments and controls 3-37
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (162,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-38 Instruments and controls
housing. That may cause a malfunction
in the mirror.
! Rear view image display
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position and the transmission is in the “R”
(reverse) position, the rear view camera
automatically displays the rear view image
behind the vehicle on the inside mirror.
Also, the following help lines are indicated
as a guide to help you realize the actual
distance from the display.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
By pressing the power button while the
transmission is in the “R” (reverse) posi-
tion, the rear view image display toggles to
the on or off mode.
Once the rear view image display is set to
the off mode, the display stays in the off
mode, with the function indicator in or-
ange, every t ime t he transm ission is
shifted into the “R” (reverse) position.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position, the display setting returns to the
on mode as a default setting the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
! Language mode change
The language mode of the captions on the
rear view image display is selectable in
English or French in the following ways.
1. Press and hold the power button for 6
to 12 seconds while the transmission is in
the “R” (reverse) position, and then
release it. The display will enter the
language selection mode.
2. Briefly press the power button to
toggle the captions on the display in
English or French.
3. By releasing the power button for 5
seconds, the display blinks one time to
show that the language mode is selected.
! Non-operational mode
The rear view image display can be set as
non-operational. After setting the display
to the non-operational mode, the display
does not show the rear view image even if
the ignition switch is reset (turning the
ignition switch to the “ON” position after
turning it to the “OFF” position).
To set the display to the non-operational
Black plate (163,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
mode, press and hold the power button for
12 to 15 seconds while the transmission is
in the “R” (reverse) position, and then
release it. The display is now in the non-
operational mode. After the display has
been set to the non-operational mode, the
function indicator will illuminate in orange
while the transmission is in the “R”
(reverse) position.
To return the display to the operational
mode, press and hold the power button for
12 to 15 seconds again.
For precautions about the rear view
camera and the rear view image, refer to
“Rear view camera” F6-18.
! Electronic compass display
By briefly pressing the compass button,
the compass display is toggled on or off.
When the compass display is on, an
illuminated compass reading will appear
on the mirror.
Using the electronic compass properly,
the following compass zone adjustment
and compass calibration will be neces-
sary.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass c alibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass button for
3 to 6 seconds, and then release it. The
zone number will be shown on the
electronic compass display.
3. Press the compass button repeatedly
until the correct zone number for your
location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the compass button for
6 to 9 seconds, and then release it. The
compass will enter the calibration mode,
then “C” and the direction will be dis-
played.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “C”
disappears from the display. Driving in
two or three circles might be necessary.
The compass is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the com-
pass to read inaccurately. You will notice
any outside influence if the compass tends
to read in only one particular direction.
Should you encounter this situation, return
to step 1 of the above procedure and
recalibrate the compass.
Instruments and controls 3-39
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (164,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-40 Instruments and controls
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
Note the following information about this
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communica tions Commission Rules in
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) thi s device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you m ay be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make su re that people
and objects are out of the way
ofthegaragedoororother
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
Black plate (165,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
button you wish to pro-
gram.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with proce-
dures in “Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada” F3-42.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A. ” F3-42.
Instruments and controls 3-41
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-42 Instruments and controls
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-40. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on t he
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the train ing button on the
garage door opener motor he ad unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious secti on. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing th e HomeLi nk
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Instruments and controls 3-43
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-44 Instruments and controls
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button af ter
programming, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
& Auto-dimming mirror with
compass (if equipped)
1) LED
2) Switch
3) Sensor
4) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and holding the switch for
less than 3 seconds, the automatic dim-
ming function is toggled on or off. When
the automatic dimming function is on, the
LED indicator will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good reward visibility during
reversing.
. By pressing and releasing the switch
for 3 seconds, the compass display is
toggled on or off. When the compass is
on, an illuminated compass reading will
appear in the upper right corner of the
mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter t he mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
the front and back sides. During nighttime
driving, these sensors detect distracting
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
glare from vehicle headlights behind you
and automatically dim the mirror to elim-
inate glare and preserve your vision. For
this reason, use care not to cover the
sensors with stickers, or other similar
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an
applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass c alibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the switch for 6
seconds until the zone selection comes
up (a number will be displayed in the
mirror compass window).
3. Press the switch repeatedly until the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
will exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C”
appears in the compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
& Auto-dimming mirror with
compass and HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
8) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink
®
wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
Instruments and controls 3-45
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-46 Instruments and controls
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
theliquidcleanertoenterthemirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone
selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. Your can also calibrate the compass
by driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a “C” appear s in the
compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
Note the following information about this
system.
Ifyourvehicleisequippedwiththe
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission Rules in
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) thi s device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you m ay be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make su re that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or
damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
Instruments and controls 3-47
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-48 Instruments and controls
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in th e event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
button you wish to pro-
gram.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with proce-
dures in “Programming for entrance
gates and g arage door openers in
Canada” F3-49.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A. ” F3-49.
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-48. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on t he
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the train ing button on the
garage door opener motor he ad unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious secti on. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
Instruments and controls 3-49
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-50 Instruments and controls
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing th e HomeLi nk
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
button s be
erased for security purposes.
Black plate (175,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button af ter
programming, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge t he
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
adjust the right-hand mirror.
2. Move the knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position
to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
Instruments and controls 3-51
3
Black plate (176,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3-52 Instruments and controls
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/
telescopic p osition while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control and result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat posi tion. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2
Airflow selection ................................................. 4-2
Ventilators........................................................... 4-3
Manual climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-4
Control panel ...................................................... 4-4
Heater operation ................................................. 4-6
Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8
Control panel ...................................................... 4-9
Temperature sensors.......................................... 4-13
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner....................................................... 4-14
Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-14
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-14
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-14
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-14
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather condition................... 4-14
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-14
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-14
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-15
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-15
Climate control
4
Black plate (180,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Airflow selection
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Ventilators
! Center ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille
open/close wheel to the “
” position.
To close it, turn the wheel to the “
”
position.
! Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close w heel upward to t he “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
Climate control 4-3
4
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-4 Climate control
Manual climate control system (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Fan speed control dial
2) Temperature control dial
3) Airflow control buttons
4) Air conditioner button
5) Air inlet selection button
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-34.)
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The
fan speed control dial is used to select
four fan speeds.
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets over a range
from th e blue side (cool) to red side
(warm).
! Airflow control buttons
Each airflow control button activates the
following air outlets.
: Instrument panel outlets
: Instrument panel outlets and foot
outlets
: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
: Windshield defroster outlets, foot out-
lets and both side outlets of the instrument
panel
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
side outlets of the instrument panel
NOTE
When the “ ” button or “ ” button is
pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the
indicator on the air conditioner button
will not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
set to “outside air ” mode.
Climate control 4-5
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-6 Climate control
! Air conditioner button
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. The indicator light will illumi-
nate.
Press it again to turn off the air condi-
tioner. The indicator light will turn off.
! Air inlet selection button
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the air inlet button to the ON
position. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place this button in the ON position when
you wish to cool the cabin quickly or are
driving on a dusty road.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet button again to the OFF
position. The indicator light will turn off.
Place this button in the OFF position when
you reach a road that is not dusty and
when you wish to achieve a comfortable
temperature in the cabin.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
& Heater operation
NOTE
. When the “ ” button or “ ” button
is pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the
indicator on the air conditioner button
will not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
set to “outside air ” mode.
. Warm air also comes out from the
right and left air outlets. To stop warm
airflow from these outlets, turn the
corresponding wheel to the “
” posi-
tion.
! Defrosting or defogging the wind-
shield
To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3. Turn the temperature control dial all
the way to the right.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
highest speed.
! Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the
windshield:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
! Heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
! Bi-level heating
This setting allows you to direct air of
different temperatures from the instrument
panel and foot outlets. The air from the
foot outlets is slightly warmer than from
the instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired temperature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully
turned to th e red a rea or blue area
decreases the temperature difference
between the air from the instrument panel
outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument
panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the
way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air
inlet control button to the ON position.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
& Air conditioner operation
! Cooling or dehumidifying
For cooling and dehumidification of the
passenger compartment, air flows through
the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
2. Press the “
” button.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the
“ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the
blue side.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
desired speed.
! Defrosting or defogging
To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
1. Press the “
” button.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
red side.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
Climate control 4-7
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-8 Climate control
NOTE
When the “ ” button or “ ” button is
pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the
indicator on the air conditioner button
will not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
set to “outside air ” mode.
Automatic climate control
system (if equipped)
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a l ow
speed when the engine coolant tem-
perature is low.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
The automatic climate control system
automatically controls outlet air tempera-
ture, fan speed, airflow distribution air-inlet
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation. It activates when the fan speed
control button or the “AUTO” button is
pressed, and is used to maintain a
constant, comfortable climate within the
passenger compartment. If you press the
defroster button while the automatic cli-
mate control system is deactivated, only
the defroster function will be activated.
The temperature can be set within a range
of 61 to 898F (18.5 to 31.58C).
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Control panel
1) Temperature control button (driver’s side)
2) Dual mode button
3) Airflow mode selection button
4) Fan speed control button
5) Temperature control button (front pas-
senger’s side)
6) AUTO button
7) OFF button
8) Air inlet selection button
9) Defroster button
10) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-34.)
11) Air conditioner button
Climate control
4-9
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-10 Climate control
! AUTO button
FULL AUTO mode operation:
When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the
indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates. In this state, fan speed, airflow
distribution, air-inlet control, and air con-
ditioner compressor operation are auto-
matically controlled.
AUTO mode operation:
If you operate any of the buttons on the
control panel other than the “OFF” button,
rear window defogger button and tem-
perature control buttons during FULL
AUTO mode operation, the indicator light
“FULL” on the control panel will turn off
and the indicator light “AUTO” will remain
illuminated. You can then manually control
the system as desired using the button
you operated. To change the system back
to the FULL AUTO mode, press the
“AUTO” button.
! OFF button
The automatic climate control system
turns off (the air conditioner compressor
and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is
pressed.
When the “OFF” button is pressed, the
outside air circulati on mode (a ir inlet
selection OFF) is automatically selected.
! Temperature control button
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
To increase the temperature setting, press
the “
” side of the temperature control
button. To decrease the temperature
Black plate (189,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
setting, press the “ ” side of the tempera-
ture control button.
Each temperature setting is shown on the
display. When the “LO” is shown, the
system provides maximum cooling perfor-
mance. When the “HI” is shown, the
system provides maximum heating perfor-
mance.
! DUAL mode
It is possible to make separate tempera-
ture settings for the driver’s side and
passenger’s side (DUAL mode).
To activate the DUAL mode:
Press the “DUAL” button. When the DUAL
mode is activated, the indicator light on
the “DUAL” button illuminates.
To deactivate the DUAL mode:
Press the “DUAL” button again. When the
DUAL mode is deactivated, the indicator
light on the “DUAL” button turns off and
the temperature setting for the front
passenger’s side becomes the same as
the setting for the driver’s side.
!
– Defroster button
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows, press the defros-
ter button “
”. When the “ ” button is
pressed, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates to quickly defog
the windshield, outside air is drawn into
the passenger compartment, airflow is
directed towards the windshield and front
door windows, and the indicator light on
the button illuminates.
After eliminating the fogging from the
windshield, return the climate control
systemtotheFULLAUTOmodeby
pressing the “AUTO” button or turn off by
pressing the “OFF” button.
Alternatively, press the “
” button again
to return the system to the setting that was
selected before you activated the defros-
ter.
! Fan speed control button
The fan speed control button has 6
different fan speed positions.
The fan speed is shown by the display.
Climate control 4-11
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (190,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-12 Climate control
! A/C – Air conditioner button
If the windshield starts to fog when the
climate control system is operated in the
AUTO mode, press the air conditioner
button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify.
When this button is pressed, the air
conditioner compressor turns on and the
indicator light “A/C” on the display illumi-
nates. To turn off the air conditioner
compressor, press the “A/C” button again.
NOTE
The air conditioner compressor does
not operate when the outside air tem-
perature is below 328F(08C).
! Airflow mode selection button
Select the desired airflow mode by press-
ing the airflow mode selection button. The
selected airflow mode is shown on the
display.
There are four airflow modes that activate
the following air outlets.
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of
the instrument panel
NOTE
When the “ ” mode is selected, the air
conditioner compressor automatically
operates to quickly defog the wind-
shield and the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the “outside air”
mode.
! Air inlet selection button
Select airflow by pressing the air inlet
selection button “
”.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
Black plate (191,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
when driving on a dusty road. The
indicator light will illuminate.
OFF position (outside Air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion (recirculation) may fog up the
windows. Switch to the OFF position
(outside air) as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
NOTE
When driving on a dusty road or behind
a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust
gases, set the air inlet selection button
to the ON position (recirculation).
From time to time, return the air inlet
selection button to the OFF position
(outside air) to draw outside air into the
passenger compartment.
& Temperature sensors
1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille
on the dashboard
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel
– Outside temperature sensor: behin d
front grille.
Climate control 4-13
4
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-14 Climate control
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any probl em with the air conditioni ng
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Air filtration system
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule shown in the
following table. This schedule should be
followed to maintain the filter ’s dust
collection ability. Under extremely dusty
conditions, the filter should be replaced
more frequently. Have your filter checked
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
replacement, use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
(3) Pull out the glove box.
2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
Climate control 4-15
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4-16 Climate control
3. Remove the air filter.
4. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.
5. Reinstall the cover of the air filter.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
7. Close the glove box.
8. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).
1) Service label
(2) Attach the service lab el to the
driver’s side door pillar.
1) Caution label
(3) Attach the caution label on the
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
driver’s side of the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
Climate control 4-17
4
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Printed antenna................................................... 5-2
FM reception....................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-4
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5
Power and sound controls ................................. 5-6
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-6
Sound control ..................................................... 5-6
Adjustable level of each mode ............................. 5-8
FM/AM radio operation ....................................... 5-9
FM selection ....................................................... 5-9
AM selection ....................................................... 5-9
Tuning ................................................................ 5-9
RDS text display ................................................ 5-11
Station preset .................................................... 5-12
Satellite radio operat ion (if equipped) .............. 5-13
XM
TM
satellite radio (for U.S.A. only) ................... 5-13
Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-13
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-14
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-15
Band selection ................................................... 5-15
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-16
Channel preset................................................... 5-17
Display selection................................................ 5-18
CD player operation .......................................... 5-18
How to insert a CD (type A)................................ 5-19
How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-19
How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-20
To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-21
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-22
Repeating .......................................................... 5-23
Random playback .............................................. 5-24
Scan ................................................................. 5-25
Display selection ............................................... 5-25
Folder selection................................................. 5-26
How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ......... 5-26
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-26
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-27
Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-28
Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc................................................... 5-29
Audio control buttons (if equipped) ................. 5-31
MODE button..................................................... 5-31
“
” and “ ” switch .......................................... 5-31
Volume control switch ....................................... 5-32
MUTE button (if equipped) ................................. 5-32
Hands-free system (if equipped) ...................... 5-32
Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-33
Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-34
Safety precautions............................................. 5-34
Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-35
Audio
5
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-2 Audio
Antenna system
& Printed antenna
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station inter-
ference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories
Always consu lt you r SUBAR U dea ler
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated i n this section for operating
details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
Audio 5-3
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-4 Audio
& Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-6
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-9
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-28
Black plate (201,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Type B audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-6
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-9
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-28
Audio 5-5
5
Black plate (202,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-6 Audio
Power and sound controls
& Power switch and volume
control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned
ON and OFF by pressing the dial, and the
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
& Sound control
! Tone and balance control
Each brief press of the “TUNE/TRACK/
CH” dial changes the control modes in the
following sequence.
Choose the desired level for each mode
by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH ” dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
! Other sound setting controls (type
A audio)
Each brief press of the “MENU” button
changes the control modes in the follow-
ing sequence.
Choose the desired settings for each
mode by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
Black plate (203,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! SVC setting
SVC (Speed Volume Control) is a function
that automatically adjusts the volume
according to the vehicle speed. As the
vehicle speed increases, the audio vo-
lume automatically increases to match the
vehicle speed, in order to create a
pleasant listening environment even as
the driving noise increases. The amount of
this automatic volume change can be set
in the range from OFF to 2. The initial
setting is OFF.
! SRSCSAuto
TM
setting (type A
audio)
SRS CS Auto
TM
can be set in the range
from OFF to 2. When this setting is ON (1
or 2), “
” is displayed on the screen.
NOTE
SRS CS Auto
TM
creates a 5.1ch equiva-
lent surround field using 4 speakers
that are installed in the vehicle.
SRS CS Auto
TM
features:
1) Sound originating from door mount
speakers can be heard at ear level
(built in SRS FOCUS
TM
effect).
2) Ultra rich bass sound can be ob-
tained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass
®
ef-
fect).
3) Surround sound can be obtained
from 2-channel stereo sources such as
CD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS Circle
Surround II
TM
effect).
4) SRS CS Auto
TM
can position the
center channel image in the center of
the vehicle’s windshield. This elimi-
nates the need for a center speaker
(built i n SRS Circle Surround II
TM
phantom center and SRS FOCUS
TM
effects).
CS Auto, SRS and “
” symbol are
trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
CS Auto technology is incorporated
under license from SRS Labs, inc.
! Position setting
Position setting is used to adjust the
sound to the best condition for the
selected seating position.
ALL: The sound is adjusted to the best for
all seating positions.
FR: The sound is adjusted to the best for
the front passenger.
FL: The sound is adjusted to the best for
the driver.
Audio 5-7
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-8 Audio
& Adjustable level of each mode
Mode Range of levels
(displayed)
Initial setting Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control − 8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
CS Auto (type A audio) OFF to 2 OFF From 2 to 1, 1 to OFF From OFF to 1, 1 to 2
POSITION ALL, FR, FL ALL From FL to FR, FR to ALL
From ALL to FR, FR to FL
*Only when an AUX audio product is connected.
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
FM/AM radio operation
Press the “FM” or “AM” button when the
radio is off to turn on the radio.
& FM selection
Press the “FM” button when the radio is on
to select FM1, FM2 or FM3 reception.
Each brief press of the “FM” button
changes the radio in the following se-
quence starting from the last FM radio
band that you selected.
& AM selection
Press the “AM” button when the radio is on
to select AM reception.
& Tuning
! Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to increase the tuning frequency and
turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to decrease it.
Each time the dial is turned, the frequency
interval can be changed between 10 kHz
in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
Audio 5-9
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-10 Audio
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button briefly, the radio will auto-
matically search for a receivable station
and stop at the first one it finds. This
function may not be available, however,
when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select
the desired station.
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
the radio scans through the radio band
until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for 5 seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning
will continue until the entire band has been
scanned.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode. If you press the “SCAN”
button while the radio is stopped at a
station, the radio stays stopped at that
station. If you press the button while the
radio is scanning, the radio stops at the
next receivable station.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception)
Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to
the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
PTY group that you are currently listening
to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY
selection mode, “PTY SEL” is displayed
on the screen.
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! PTY (Program type) group selection
In PTY selection mode, press the “PTY”
button “
” or “ ” to change the PTY
group by one step at a time.
Pressing “
” changes the PTY group up
by one step. Pressing “
” changes the
PTY group down by one step.
This operation only changes the display. It
does not c hange the station that i s
currently being received.
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
In the PTY selection mode, when the
desired PTY group has been selected,
pressing the “SEEK” button “
” or “ ”
seeks within that PTY group. In this case,
“PTY SEEK” is displayed on the screen.
Pressing “
” seeks up. Pressing “ ”
seeks down.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
& RDS text display
If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
the “TEXT” button changes the display
among PS, RT and frequency. The initial
setting is “PS”.
NOTE
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 16 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
Audio 5-11
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-12 Audio
& Station preset
Preset buttons
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM” or “AM” button to select
FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception.
2. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button or tune the radio manually
until the desired station f requency is
displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
frequency. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset stations.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate a radio
malfunction.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
allows you to select that station in a single
operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and
FM3 stations each may be preset.
! Auto-store
Using the Auto-store function, you can
automatically store 6 stations on the
current waveband by pressing the “A.S”
button for more than 2 seconds. Use Auto-
store to quickly find the strongest stations,
for example when traveling through differ-
ent reception areas.
NOTE
. When you use Auto-store, the new
stations replace any stations pre-
viously stored.
. Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci-
dentally press the “A.S” (Auto-store)
button, you can cancel the Auto-store
function before it has been completed
as follows.
– Switching to the other source
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
mode
– Switching to the other band
– Press the “A.S” button
– Press the “SCAN” button
– Press the “SEEK” button
– Press any of the preset buttons
– Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
– Turn off the audio system
– Turn off the ignition switch
. When you use the Auto-store func-
tion while selecting the FM mode, even
if you have selected the FM1 or FM2
station, the new stations are stored in
the FM3 station.
. If it is only possible to receive less
than 6 stations, the available stations
are stored from preset 1 in order by
frequency and the unused preset but-
tons are not registered to a station.
Also, the previously registered station
memories of the unused preset buttons
are cleared.
. If no stations can be received, the
previously stored stations are not re-
placed.
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if
more than 1 station is stored, the radio
receives the station stored in preset 1.
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if no
stations are stored, the radio receives
the band and station that the radio
received before pressing the button.
Satellite radio operation (if
equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
install the SUBARU genuine satell ite
receiver for some models, and to enter
into a contract with a satellite radio
network service such as “XM
TM
satellite
radio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satellite
radio”. For details, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& XM
TM
satellite radio (for U.S.
A. only)
XM
TM
is a continental U.S. based satellite
radio service, including music, news,
sports, talk and children’s programming.
XM
TM
provides digital quality audio and
text information, including song title and
artist name. A service fee is required to
receive the XM
TM
service. For more
information, contact XM
TM
at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-
RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
& Sirius satellite radio
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
that allows the listene r to experien ce
digital sound quality and to have a greater
variety of channels.
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
Audio 5-13
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-14 Audio
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
details, please contact your SUBARU
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS
(7474) for more information. Sirius, the
Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos
are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Inc.
& Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
stances that may result in signal loss
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
or driving on the lower level of a multi-
tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
rad io providers have installed ground-
based repeater s in hea vily populated
areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
! XM
TM
satellite radio reception tips
for antenna on the windshield (for
U.S.A. only — if equipped)
For some models, the satellite radio
antenna is fixed to the upper right hand
corner of the windshield.
The XM
TM
satellite radio receiver that is
fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-
sary signals from two specially designated
satellites that are in a geostationary orbit
over the equator. One satellite covers the
east coast and the other covers the west
coast. Both of them direct their signals
north. These si gnals are then relayed
throughout the radio reception area by a
network of ground repeater stations. The
satellite radio signals are transmitted as
“line of sight” signals. The line of sight
signals can be blocked by objects such as
buil dings, but the network of repeater
stations all ows signal coverage within
urban areas such as cities.
You may experience problems in receiving
XM
TM
satellite radio signals in the follow-
ing situations.
. If you are driving northward in a coastal
area
Because the satellite radio antenna is
located on the windshield, the signal
comes from the south and may not be
able to reach the antenna in some
circumstances when you are driving north.
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area
. If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. If you drive under a bridge
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the
signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the signal
from the south
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the repeater
station network.
Please note tha t these may be other
unforeseen circumstances when there
are problems with the reception of XM
TM
satellite radio signals.
& Displaying satellite radio ID
of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to
“000”.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
the satellite radio channel.
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
operation.
& Band selection
Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
off to turn on the radio.
Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion.
Audio 5-15
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-16 Audio
& Channel and category selec-
tion
! Channel selection by operating the
dial
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to select the next channel and turn
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counterclock-
wise to select the previous channel.
! Channel selection by pressing the
button
When in the SAT mode, briefly press the
“SEEK” button “
” or “ ” to select the
channel.
! Skip channel selection
When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK”
button “
” or “ ” continuously to
change to the channel selection mode.
Pressing the “SEEK” button “
” changes
the channel up by 10 steps each time.
Pressing “
” changes the channel down
by 10 steps each time.
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Category selection
To activate the category search mode,
press the “ PTY/CAT” button. To deactivate
the categ ory search mode, press the
“PTY/CAT” button again.
When in the category search mode,
pressing the “ FOLDER ” button “
”
changes the category up by one step.
Pressing “
” changes the category down
by one step.
When a category is selected, pressing the
“SEEK” button selects channels only with-
in the selected category.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
! Channel scan
If you press the “SCAN” button while the
radio is in the category search mode, the
radio turns to the category SCAN mode. In
the category SCAN mode, the radio scans
only channels in the selected category.
If you press the “SCAN” button while the
radio is not in the category search mode,
the radio turns to the ALL SCAN mode. In
the ALL SCAN mode, the radio scans all
channels.
In both SCAN modes, the radio will stop at
the station for 5 seconds while displaying
the channel number, after which scanning
will continue until the entire channel has
been scanned from the low end to the high
end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
& Channel preset
Preset buttons
Audio
5-17
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-18 Audio
! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Select the desired channel.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
channel. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such
as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset channels.
! Selecting preset channels
Presetting a channel with a preset button
allows you to select that channel in a
single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
& Display selection
Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
the satellite radio to change the display as
follows:
CD player operation
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, the
player displays “CHECK DISC”.
Refer to “When the following messages
are displayed” F5-27.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. After the last track finishes, the disc
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc) and will auto-
matically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not
supported, and if inserted, they will be
immediately ejected.
. Copyright protected WMA/AAC files
will not be played by the system. The
player will automatically skip to the
next file (track).
. Audio data recorded in the MP3/
WMA/AAC formats may not be played
depending on the data recording con-
dition.
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& How to insert a CD (type A)
While the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or
“ON” position, hold a disc with a finger in
the center hole while gripping the edge of
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with
the label side up) and the player will
automatically pull the disc into position.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
& How to insert a CD(s) (type B)
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
no idle position in the magazine.
2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
turn off and the “LOADING” indicator will
illuminate. The disc will then be automa-
tically drawn in, the player will begin to
play back the first track of the disc, the
“LOADING” indicator will turn off and the
“READING” indicator will illuminate.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
. If you do not insert any disc in 15
seconds after you have pressed the
“LOAD” button, the player will return to
the original mode that was selected before
the “LOAD” button was pressed.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
disc is already inserted in the correspond-
ing position of the magazine.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press “FM”, “AM” or “SAT” button,
the player will enter the standby mode.
Press the “CD/AUX” button to start play-
back.
! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-
tion
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
magazine in the player has an i dle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indica-
tor of which steadily lights up are already
loaded with discs.
Audio 5-19
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-20 Audio
Disc select buttons
2. Press the disc select button at the
position where you want to insert a disc.
3. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play
the first track on the disc.
. If you wish to insert another disc,
repeat the procedure beginning with step
1.
. If you do not insert any disc in 15
seconds after you have pressed the
“LOAD” button, the player will return to
the original mode that was selected before
the “LOAD” button was pressed.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press “FM”, “AM” or “SAT” button,
the player will enter standby mode. Press
the “CD/AUX” button to start playback.
! Loading all the magazine (full disc
loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”
button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
player will produce beep sound and will
enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator
flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
disc is successfully loaded during this
period, the disc number indicator will stop
blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is com-
plete, the next idle disc number indicator
will blink. Then repeat step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs
by repeating steps 2 and 3, the player will
start playback of the discs, beginning with
the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
NOTE
For type A audio, if a disc that the
player cannot read has been loaded,
the player will display the message
“CHECK DISC”.
! When there is no CD inserted
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
CD (type A)” F5-19 / “How to insert a CD
(s) (type B)” F5-19.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! When CD is in the player (type A)/
When playing back all CDs in the
player (type B)
When the “CD/AUX” button is pressed, the
player will start playback.
! When selecting a CD to play (type
B)
Disc select buttons
Press a desired one of the disc select
buttons the disc number indicator of which
steadily lights up. The player will then start
playback of the selected CD, beginning
with the first track.
& To select a track from its
beginning
! Forward direction
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to skip to the beginning of the next
track/file (track). Each time the dial is
turned, the indicated track/file (track)
number will increase.
NOTE
In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder, skip-
ping past the last track/file (track) will
take you back to the first track/file
(track) in the folder.
Audio 5-21
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-22 Audio
! Backward direction
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track/file (track). Each time the dial
is turned, the indicated track/file (track)
number will decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder, skip-
ping past the first track/file (track) will
take you to the last track/file (track) in
the folder.
& Fast-forwarding and fast-re-
versing
! Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
continuously to fast-forward the track/file.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward to the end of the last
track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).
! Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
continuously to fast-reverse the track/file.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
will stop and the player will start play-
back.
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Repeating
Type A audio
Type B audio
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press
the “RPT/RDM” button (type A audio) or
“RPT” button (type B audio) while the
track/file (track) is playing.
Each time you briefly press the button, the
mode changes in the following se-
quences.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
NOTE
. The “TRACK RPT” indication refers
to the repeat playback of a single track.
It repeats the track that is playing.
. The “FOLDER RPT” indication re-
fers to the repeat playback of a folder. It
repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It i s possib le to select the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mat track is playing.
. The “DISC RPT” indication refers to
the repeat playback of a disc. It repeats
the tracks on the CD. It is only possible
to select this function for type B audio.
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
mode, briefly press the “RPT” button and
select CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will
turn off, and the normal playback mode
will be resumed.
NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button and
select CANCEL (type A audio)
. Press the “RPT” button and select
CANCEL (type B audio)
. Press the “
” button
. Press the disc select button
. Press the “SCAN” button
. Press the “LOAD” bu tton when
there is free space in the CD magazine
Audio 5-23
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-24 Audio
& Random playback
Type A audio
Type B audio
To play back a track/file(s) at random,
press th e “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer (type A audio) or press
the “RDM” button (type B audio).
. For type A audio, press the “RPT/RDM”
button for 0.5 second or longer.
. For type B audio, press the “ RDM”
button.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
NOTE
. The “RDM” indication refers to the
random play back of the trac ks. It
randomly repeats the tracks on the
CD. It is possible to select the function
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/
AAC format CD is playing.
. The “FOLDER RDM” indication re-
fers to the random playback in the
folder. It randomly repeats the tracks in
the folder. It is possible to select the
function when an MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mat track is playing.
. The “DISC RDM” indication refers to
the random playback of a disc. It
randomly repeats the tracks in the CD.
It is possible to select the function
when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer again (type A audio) or
press the “RPT” button again (type B
audio) and select CANCEL.
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer and select CANCEL
(type A audio)
. Press the “RPT” button and select
CANCEL (type B audio)
. Press the “
” button
. Press the disc select button
. Press the “SCAN” button
. Press the “LOAD” bu tton when
there is free space in the CD magazine
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button
Black plate (221,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track/file in succes-
sion. Press the “SCAN” button to start
scanning upward beginning with the track/
file(s) following the currently selected one.
After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have
been scanned, normal playback will be
resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
the “SCAN” button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT” button
. Press the “RDM” button
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button
. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button
. Press the “
” button
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button
. Press the disc select button
. Select the radio or AUX mode
. P ress the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position
& Display selection
If you press the “TEXT” button during
playback, the indication will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
For CD-DA:
For MP3/WMA/AAC:
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
If you press the “TEXT” button again for at
least 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled
so you can see all of it.
Audio 5-25
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (222,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-26 Audio
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles
for up to 30 characters.
& Folder selection
Press the “ ” si de of the “FOLDER”
button briefly to select the next folder.
Press the “
” side of the button briefly to
go back to the previous folder.
NOTE
. Sel ecting folders in this way is
possible only within a single disc.
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re-
cognized when an attempt to select the
next or previous folder is made. If no
appropriate folder exists on the disc,
pressing the “
” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” button starts playback be-
ginning with the first track/file (track).
& How to eject a CD from the
player (type A)
When a disc is being played back or when
a disc is in the player, press the eject
button “
”. The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you do not remove the ejected
disc within approximately 15 seconds,
a disc protection function will operate,
automatically reloading the disc. In this
case, the disc is not played.
& How to eject CDs from the
player (type B)
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you do not remove the ejected
disc within approximately 15 seconds,
a disc protection function will operate,
automatically reloading the disc. In this
case, the disc is not played.
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Disc select buttons
1. Use the disc select button to select the
disc to be ejected.
Black plate (223,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The
selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the
disc number indicator will turn off.
To remove more di scs i n succession,
repeat steps 1 and 2.
! Ejecting all discs from the player
(all disc ejection mode)
1. If you press the “ ” button for 1.5
seconds or longer, the player will produce
beep sound and will enter the all disc
ejection mode. At this time, the disc
number indicator and “ALL EJECT” indi-
cator will flash.
2.Removethediscthathasbeen
ejected. The other discs loaded will then
be ejected one after another.
NOTE
. If you press the “ ” button while
the player is in all disc ejection mode,
the mode will be cancelled following
ejection of the disc that is currently
being ejected.
. If you press the “CD/AUX” button or
“LOAD” button while the player is in all
disc ejection mode, the player will draw
in the discs that have been ejected and
play them.
& When the following mes-
sages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
ing information. If you cannot clear those
messages, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
Press the eject button to unload the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deforma-
tion, and also check that the correct disc is
inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected. If the disc cannot
be unloaded or this message remains
displayed, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the eject button to unload the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. This message may
appear when using some CD-RW discs.
Audio 5-27
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-28 Audio
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
CDs are not supported) and data format
are correct. This player can only play CD-
DA, MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If
the disc cannot be unloaded or this
message remains displayed, please con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
Auxiliary input jack
By connecting a commercial audio pro-
duct to the vehicle, such as a portable
audio player, you can hear its sound via
the vehicle’s speaker.
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is equipped
in the center console. A stereo mini pin
plug (3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack.
The connection cable is available at
electrical appliance or similar stores.
To use the AUX input jack:
1. Connect a portable audio player to the
AUX input jack.
2. Press the AUX input selection button
“CD/AUX” on the audio control panel to
turn on the auxiliary audio input.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the Owner ’s Manual of the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set is
very low. If you turn up the volume of
the audio set , the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the player to the other portable audio
player, the sound may become a lot
louder. Turn down the volume when
you change between them.
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound becomes bad when you
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the audio system.
Try cleaning the stereo jack and audio
plug.
. If noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or malfunc-
tions of the portable player.
Precautions to observe when
handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following illustration. Also, some compact
discs cannot be played.
Audio 5-29
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-30 Audio
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a rough cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or i n vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. Insert discs one by one into the CD
player.
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Audio control buttons
(if equipped)
Type A audio
Type B audio
These buttons are located on the spokes
of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
& MODE button
This button is used to select the desired
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the
following sequence.
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when an auxiliary audio product is
connected.
*4: Only when an iPod is connected using the
iPod adapter that is available as a dealer
option.
& “ ” and “ ” switch
! With radio mode selected
Press the switch to the “
” or “ ” side
briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press
the switch to the “
” or “ ” side for more
than 0.5 second to seek the next recei-
vable station and stop at it.
That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.
! With CD mode selected
Press the switch to the “
” side to skip
forward in the track/file (track) order. Press
the switch to the “
” side to skip back-
Audio 5-31
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-32 Audio
ward in the track/file (track) order.
The track/file (track) number will be shown
on the audio display.
! With SAT mode selected
Press the switch to the “
” side to skip
forward in the channel order. Press the
switch to the “
” side to skip backward in
the channel order. When the switch is
briefly pressed, the channel will skip every
1 channel. When the switch is pressed for
more than 0.5 second, the channel will
skip every 10 channels. The channel will
be shown on the audio display.
& Volume control switch
Press the switch to the “+” side to increase
the volume. Press the switch to the “−”
side to reduce the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display.
& MUTE button (if equipped)
Press this button if you wish to immedi-
ately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE”
turns off.
Hands-free system (if
equipped)
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
. When selling your vehicle, make
sure that you initialize the Hands-free
system to prevent personal data from
being improperly accessed.
The Hands-free system operates while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Tips for the Hands-free sys-
tem
! Bluetooth
®
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
tooth
®
format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
an incoming phone call.
Since the Bluetooth
®
format is wireless, a
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
ment and the cell phone can be made
without placing them in close vicinity of
each other. The cell phone can be used
with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
NOTE
. The Hands-free s ystem may not
operate properly under the following
conditions.
– The cell phone is turned off.
– The cell phone is not in the
phone call area.
– The battery of the cell phone has
run down.
– The cell phone is not connected
to the Hands-free system.
– The cell phone is behind the seat
or in the glove box.
– A metal material covers or
touches the cell phone.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, the screen on the cell
phone may remain illuminated while
the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi-
nation off by adjusting the cell phone
settings.
. Depending on the setting of the cell
phone, the dial lock function may be
activated after making a call. Deacti-
vate the automatic dial lock function of
the cell phone before using the Hands-
free system.
. Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, operation and the sound
volume may be different from those of
cell phones currently used.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position during a call, the
call may be disconnected or continued
on the cell phone depending on the
type of cell phone that is used. Note
that operation of the cell phone may be
necessary if the call is continued on the
cell phone.
. Do not speak at the same time as the
other party during a call. If you and the
party speak at the same time, it may be
difficult for the other party to hear your
voice and vice versa. This is normal.
. The receiver sound volume should
be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
the party you are calling may notice an
undesirable echo sound.
. Speak clearly and loudly.
. Your voice may be difficult to be
heard by the party under the following
conditions.
– Driving on a rough road.
– Driving at a high speed.
– Driving with a window open.
– When air from the venti lator
blows directly towards the micro-
phone.
– When the sound coming from the
ventilator is loud.
Audio 5-33
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-34 Audio
– When the cell phone is too close
to the microphone.
. The sound quality may degrade due
to the influence of the cell phone that is
connected to the system or the circum-
stances of the Bluetooth network.
. When another Bluetooth
®
device is
simultaneously connected, noise may
be heard in the voice coming from the
hands-free phone.
! Corresponding profiles for the cell
phone
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
& Certification for the Hands-
free system
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
. This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications, if it is not
installed and used in accordance with
the instructions. However, there is no
guarantee t hat interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following
measures.
– Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
– Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experi-
enced radio/TV technician for help.
& Safety precautions
WARNING
. For safety reasons, avoid operat-
ing of the cell phone while driv-
ing.
. Do not make a phone call while
driving. When you have an in-
coming call, stop the vehicle in a
safe location before taking the
incoming phone call. When you
have to absolutely take a phone
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
back”. And then call the caller
back after stopping the vehicle in
a safe location.
. Part 15 FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes of
modifications to this equipment
would void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
. Do not leave the cell phone in the
vehicle. The temperature in the
vehicle may become extremely
high and cause a malfunction of
the cell phone.
. When using the cell phone, be
careful not to get it close to the
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it
too close to the in-vehicle equip-
ment may result in deterioration
in tone quality or a poor connect-
ing condition.
. In the frequency band used by
this equipment, along with indus-
trial, scientific and medical
equipment such as a microwave
oven, radio stations (a license is
required) to be used by the
production line in the factory to
identify movable bodies, specific
small power radio stations (a
license is not required) and ama-
teur radio stations (a license is
required) are being operated.
(These three types of radio sta-
tions are hereinafter referred to
as “other radio stations”.) Before
using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio
stations” are being operated in
the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
equipment to “other radio sta-
tions”, move the equipment to
another location as soon as
possible to avoid radio interfer-
ence. The frequency band used
by this equipment is in the 2.4
GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
is employed as a modulation
method. The expected inflicting
interference distance is less than
33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
a full band and can avoid a band
used by a movable body identifi-
cation device.
& Using the Hands-free system
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
1) OFF hook switch
2) ON hook switch
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
OFF hook switch
. To turn off the
Hands-free mode, press the ON hook
switch
.
! Preparation for using the Hands-
free system
Before using the Hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a cell phone in the
system. Perform the following procedure
to register a cell phone.
1. Press the OFF hook switch
.
2. Select “Set up” by operati ng the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
Audio 5-35
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (232,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-36 Audio
3. Select “Phone setup” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Select “Pair phone” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
5. Press the talk switch. Refer to “Voice
command system” F5-41.
6. Say the name to be registered.
7. Sel ect “Confirm” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or say “Confirm”.
Then a pass key is displayed.
8. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell ph one while “PASS KEY: ****” is
displayed. If you input the correct pass
key, “Paired” is displayed and the register-
ing procedure is finished. If you input an
incorrect pass key, “Failed” is displayed
and the registering procedure was not
successful.
! Inputting the phone number
1. Press the OFF hook switch
.
2. Select “Phonebook” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select “Add Entry” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
4. Select “Manual Input” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
5. Input the phone number to be regis-
tered.
NOTE
While inputting the phone numbers, if
“Go Back” is chosen using the “TUNE/
TRACK/CH” dial, the character that was
input last is deleted.
! Registering the phonebook data
1. Input the phone number to be regis-
tered. Refer to “Inputting the phone
number” F5-36.
2. Say the name to be registered.
3. “Confirm” is displayed.
4. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
5. “Stored” is displayed.
6. Select “Speed Dial” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
7. Select the phone number to be regis-
tered.
Preset buttons
8. Press the preset button in which you
want to register the number. The number
is then registered.
! Page scroll
Black plate (233,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
If the registered name or phone number
has more than 12 characters, press the
“TEXT” button for more than 1.5 seconds
to scroll the name or phone number.
! Making a phone call
! Making a phone call from the phone
book
It is possible to select a phone number
from the phonebook registered with the in-
vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
1. Press the OFF hook switch
.
Preset buttons
2. Press the preset button in which the
desired number is registered.
3. Press the OFF hook switch
again.
NOTE
When a preset button for which num-
bers are not registered is pressed, an
error message is indicated on the audio
screen.
! Redial
1. Selec t “Redial” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
2. Press the OFF hook switch
.
! Callback
1. Select “Callback” by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
2. Press the OFF hook switch
.
! Taking a phone call and declining
an incoming call
To take a phone call: Press the OFF
hook switch
.
To put an incoming call on hold: Press
the ON hook switch
briefly.
To decline an incoming call: Press the
ON hook switch
for more than 1.5
seconds.
! Volume control
You can adjust the phone call volume, the
voice volume and the voice guidance
volume. Refer to “Volume control switch”
F5-32.
! Adjustable level of each volume
Volume
Range
Initial setting
Phone call 0 to 14 7
Voice 0 to 14 7
Voice guidance 1 to 7
4
Audio
5-37
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-38 Audio
! Menu list of the Hands-free system
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
a menu, and then press the dial to enter
the selected menu.
NOTE
For details about the operation, follow
the voice guidance.
Black plate (235,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
First menu Second menu Third menu Details
Phonebook* Add Entry — Adding a new number
Change Name — Changing a name registered in the phonebook
List Names — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook
Speed Dial — Registering a speed dial
Delete Entry — Deleting phonebook data
Del Spd Dial — Deleting a registered speed dial
Go Back —
Redial ——Redialing
Callback ——Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Audio
5-39
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (236,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-40 Audio
First menu Second menu Third menu Details
Setup Security
Set Pin Setting a PIN code
Phbk Lock* Locking the phonebook
Phbk Unlock* Unlocking the phonebook
Go Back
Phone setup
Pair Phone Registering a new cell phone
Select Phone Selecting a cell phone to be used
Change Name Changing the registered name of the cell phone
List Phones Showing the list of the registered cell phones
Set Passkey Changing the pass key
Delete Deleting the registered cell phone
Go Back
System setup
Guidance Vol Setting the volume of the voice guidance
Initialize Initialization
Go Back
Go Back —
*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
Black plate (237,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Voice command system
Talk switch
To turn on the voice command system,
press the talk switch
briefly. To turn off
the voice command system, press the talk
switch
for more than 1.5 seconds.
The commands available for the voice
command system are listed in the follow-
ing chart.
Command
1 0 (zero, oh)
2 1 (one)
3 2 (two)
4 3 (three)
5 4 (four)
6 5 (five)
7 6 (six)
8 7 (seven)
9 8 (eight)
10 9 (nine)
11 * (star)
12 # (pound)
13 + (plus)
14 double
15 callback
16 redial
17 dial by number
18 dial by name
19 phonebook
20 setup
21 phone book add entry
22 phone book change name
23 phone book delete entry
24 phone book list names
25 phone book set speed dial
26 phone book delete speed dial
27 phone book unlock
28 cancel
29 help
30 repeat
31 go back
32 mute
33 call transfer
34 dial
35 previous
36 delete
37 store
38 confirm
39 phone setup
40 security
41 pair phone
42 change name
43 select phone
44 list phones
Audio
5-41
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
5-42 Audio
45 set pass key
46 list phone
47 add entry
48 delete entry
49 delete speed dial
50 by voice
51 voice
52 by phone
53 phone
54 call history
55 by call history
56 set speed dial
57 next
58 incoming
59 outgoing
60 list names
61 set PIN
62 phone book lock
63 PIN setup
64
send
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Interior light ......................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Map light............................................................. 6-2
Cargo area light (Outback)................................... 6-3
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6
Center console box ............................................. 6-6
Overhead console ............................................... 6-8
Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-8
Cup holder........................................................... 6-8
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-9
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-9
Bottle holders...................................................... 6-9
Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-10
Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-12
Coat hook........................................................... 6-13
Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13
Legacy .............................................................. 6-13
Outback ............................................................ 6-14
Floor mat............................................................ 6-14
Cargo area cover (if equipped)......................... 6-15
Using the cover ................................................. 6-15
To remove the cover housing............................. 6-15
Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-15
To install the cover housing ............................... 6-16
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) ........ 6-17
Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-18
Rear view camera (if equipped)........................ 6-18
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-20
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-20
Help line............................................................ 6-22
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior light
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
& Dome light
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has three positions:
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate
(Outback) is opened.
. The doors or the rear gate (Outback)
are unlocked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated dome light
remains on for several seconds and then
gradually turns off after all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed. While the
light is on, if any of the following opera-
tions are performed, the dome light turns
off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to “ Acc” or “ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the light
remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Map light
Models with moonroof
Models without moonroof
To turn on the map light, press the switch.
To turn it off, press the switch again.
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
! Door interlock switch
1) Door interlock switch
Although the map light switches are in the
OFF position (manually off), the map lights
can be set to illuminate automatically in
conjunction with a door opening, etc. by
use of the door interlock switch. The door
interlock switch has t he following two
positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. But, the lights can be turned on
manually by pressi ng the map light
switches.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors (other than the rear
gate or trunk lid) is opened. The map lights
do not illuminate when only the rear gate
is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the map lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. All doors are locked using the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
1) DOOR
2) OFF
3) ON
The cargo area light switch has three
positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when
the rear gate is opened.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
The automatically illuminated cargo area
light remains on for several seconds and
then gradually turns off after the rear gate
is closed. While the light is on, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
cargo area light turns off immediately.
Interior equipment 6-3
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-4 Interior equipment
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. The rear gate is locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
& Sun visor extension plate
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
woul d obstruct your v iew of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Interior equipment 6-5
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-6 Interior equipment
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
& Center console box
! Center console box (front)
If you remove the divider plate from the
dual cup holders, you can use the center
console box as a storage space.
To use as storage space:
Pull out the divider plate of the dual cup
holder.
Black plate (247,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
To use again as cup holders:
Insert the divider plate into the console
box.
! Center console box (rear)
The center console box has a two-layer
structure consisting of an upper compart-
ment and a lower compartment.
! Upper compartment
1) Upper compartment lock release
Pull up the up per c ompart ment lock
release to open the upper compartment.
! Lower compartment
1) Lower compartment lock release
Pull up the lower compartment lock
release to open the lower compartment.
Interior equipment 6-7
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (248,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-8 Interior equipment
& Overhead console
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
the overhead console heats up.
Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
& Pocket (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
or leave a lighted cigarette in the
pocket. This could cause a fire.
To use the pocket, open the lid.
Cup holder
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled bev-
erages may also damage uphols-
tery or carpets.
Black plate (249,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Front passenger’s cup holder
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
A dual cup holder is built in the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage
is in the cup holder, do not fold
down or recline any seat. Otherwise,
the beverage could spill while driv-
ing and, if the beverage is hot, it
could scald you.
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you.
The door pocket equipped on each door
Interior equipment 6-9
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (250,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-10 Interior equipment
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet below the climate control
Power outlet in the center console
Power outlet in the cargo area (if equipped)
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate control, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
Black plate (251,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electri cal appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel-
erator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
Upper compartment
Lower compartment
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is
closed, a gap remains between the
center console and the lid to allow the
Interior equipment 6-11
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-12 Interior equipment
power outlet in the center console to be
used. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
Ashtray (if equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder. For the locations of the
cup holders, refer to “Cup holder” F6-8.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Coat hook
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing correct airbag deploy-
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s hand grip.
Shopping bag hook
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& Legacy
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
Interior equipment 6-13
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-14 Interior equipment
& Outback
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Floor mat
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat is secured using the built-in
grommets, by placing the grommets over
the pins and pushing them downward.
CAUTION
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is
placed back in its proper location
and correctly secured on its retain-
ing pin. Also, do not use more than
one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during
driving, it could cause an accident.
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Cargo area cover
(if equipped)
The cargo area cover is pr ovided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as sh own. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
& To remove the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Hold down the button on the right-
hand rear quarter panel and lift up the
right-hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
& Stowage of the cargo area
cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
Interior equipment 6-15
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-16 Interior equipment
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook
(provided on the back of the lid) on the
rear edge of the roof.
3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
& To install the cover housing
1. To install the cover housing, insert
both ends of the cover housing into the
retainers.
2. Make sure to fix the front part of the
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
cargo area cover behind the rear seat.
Convenient tie-down hooks
(if equipped)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing l ight
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exce eds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.
Interior equipment 6-17
6
Black plate (258,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-18 Interior equipment
Under-floor storage compart-
ment
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the sub-
floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Legacy
Outback
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
Rear view camera (if
equipped)
Legacy
Outback
Black plate (259,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
A rear view camera is attached to the
trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback).
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
or CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
navigation monitor or on the inside mirror
depending on the model.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Mov-
ing backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your S UBARU deale r
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, d o not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry o f water in th e
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful removing it .
Otherwise, damage done to the
camera may cause a fire or
electric shock. Pour water or
lukewarm water over the camera
to remove mud and ice, and wipe
it with a soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However, when
washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera lens, be careful not to scratch
the camera lens. Do not use a washing
brush directly on the camera lens. The
monitor screen may be adversely af-
fected.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop white light stripes
around the light source. This is not a
Interior equipment 6-19
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-20 Interior equipment
malfunction.
. Under fluorescent lighting, the dis-
play may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, the image
of the rear view camera has priority
over other screen displays. To operate
other screens, set the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT and CVT
models) to a position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rearview camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
Range of view
Range of view
Black plate (261,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the r ear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Interior equipment 6-21
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (262,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6-22 Interior equipment
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen.
Help lines displayed on the navigation
monitor
Help lines displayed on the inside mirror
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to position “R”, the monitor screen dis-
plays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
! Difference between screen and ac-
tual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
Black plate (263,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! When there is an upward slope at the
back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
thantheactualdistanceasinan
upward slope.
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
Interior equipment 6-23
6
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3
State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-6
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-8
MT models .......................................................... 7-8
AT and CVT models............................................. 7-9
Stopping the engine........................................... 7-10
Remote engine start system (dealer
option).............................................................. 7-10
Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-11
Remote start safety features ............................... 7-11
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start................................................................. 7-12
Remote start confirmation transmitter
feature ............................................................. 7-12
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown......................................................... 7-13
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-13
Service mode ..................................................... 7-14
Remote transmitter program............................... 7-14
System maintenance .......................................... 7-14
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-16
Selecting reverse gear........................................ 7-16
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-17
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-17
Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission ..................................... 7-18
Select lever ........................................................ 7-19
Shift lock function ............................................. 7-20
Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-22
Driving tips........................................................ 7-23
Power steering................................................... 7-23
Braking ............................................................... 7-24
Braking tips....................................................... 7-24
Brake system .................................................... 7-24
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-25
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-25
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-25
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-26
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ............................................................. 7-27
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ... ....... 7-27
Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-28
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-31
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)................................................... 7-32
Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-34
Electronic parking brake .................................... 7-34
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-37
Cruise control .................................................... 7-38
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-38
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-39
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-40
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-40
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-41
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-42
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-2 Starting and operating
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropri ate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
! Non-turbo models
The non-turbo engine is designed to
operate using unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
! Turbo models
The engine is designed to operate at
maximum performance using premium
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 93 AKI or higher. If 93 AKI fuel is not
readily available in your area, unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI
may be used with no detriment to engine
durability or driveability. However, you
may notice a slight decrease in maximum
engine performance while using 91 AKI
fuel. Use of 91 AKI fuel will not affect your
warranty coverage. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available, regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or
higher may be temporarily used. Fo r
optimum engine performance and drive-
ability, it is required that you use premium
grade unleaded gasoline.
NOTE
Be sure to use premium unleaded
gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for a turbo
engine model. If other gasoline (lower
than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re-
duced output and poor accelerator
response will result.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if
you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! California fuel
If your vehicle was certified to California
Emission Standards as indicated on the
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
optimize engine and emission control
system performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state t han California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
side California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator lamp may also
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this
happens, r eturn to your authorized
SUBARU Deal er for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
taining alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your u se of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emi ssion control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
Starting and operating 7-3
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-4 Starting and operating
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there a re no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adja-
cent area. Refueling must be
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4. Hook the cord that is attached to the
fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop me chanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically turns off. Do not add
any more fuel.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If
you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
lamp may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator lamp” F3-12.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
Starting and operating 7-5
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-6 Starting and operating
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit, and
your fuel tank and emission con-
trol system may be damaged. It
could also lead to fuel spillage
and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
gine.
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
tempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or its
contractors or licensees.
At state inspection time, remember to
tell your inspection or service station in
advance not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
Some states have started using dynam-
ometers in their state inspection programs
in order to meet their obligation under
federal law to implement stricter vehicle
emission standards to reduce air pollution
from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-
mill or roller-like testing device that allows
your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the
vehicle remains in one place. Depending
on the severity of a state’s air pollution
problems, the states must adopt either a
“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
basic emission test consists of an emis-
sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe
into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
for a short period of time. States with more
severe air pollution problems are required
to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
test. This test simulates actual driving
conditions on a dynamometer and permits
more accurate measurement of tailpipe
emitted pollution than the basic emission
test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
programs have EX EMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel
dynamometers in their testing programs.
When properly used, that equipment will
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
The EPA ha s issued regulations for
inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD) system as part of the state emis-
sions inspection. The O BD system is
designed to detect engine and transmis-
sion problems that might cause vehicle
emissions to exceed allowable limits.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model
year and newer passenger cars and light
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of
Columbia have implemented the OBD
system inspection.
. The inspection of the OBD system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator lamp (MIL) and an
examination of the OBD system with an
electronic scan tool while the engine is
running.
. Avehicle
passes the OBD system
inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illumination is observed,
there is no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBD system readiness
monitors are complete.
. A vehicle
fails the OBD inspection if the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is
not properly operating or there is one or
more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK
ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBD system readiness monitors “Not
Ready” is greater than one. Under this
condition, the vehicle operator should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to set the monitors and return for an
emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
Starting and operating 7-7
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-8 Starting and operating
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting the engine
& MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine. The starter motor will only
operate when the clutch pedal is de-
pressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the st arter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ignitio n
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
Black plate (273,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo models)
To protect the engine while the shift
lever is in the neutral position, the
engine is controlled so that the engine
speed may not become too high even if
the accelerator pedal is depressed
hard.
& AT and CVT models
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
tion.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the st arter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ignitio n
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo and 3.6 L
models)
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
engine is controlled so that the engine
speed may not become too high even if
the accelerator p edal is depressed
Starting and operating 7-9
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (274,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-10 Starting and operating
hard.
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing an d braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
Black plate (275,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Starting your vehicle
NOTE
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and
trunk / rear gate must be closed prior to
activating the remote engine start sys-
tem. Any open entry point will prevent
starting or cause the system to shut
down.
The remote engine start function is acti-
vated by pressing the “
” button twice
within 3 seconds on your remote engine
start transmitter. Upon successful activa-
tion the remote start confirming transmitter
button will flash once* and the vehicle will
honk the horn and flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and front position lights
once. The system will check certain
preconditions before starting, and if all
safety parameters are correct, the engine
will start within 5 seconds. Upon success-
ful engine start, the remote start confirma-
tion transmitter button will flash twice
every 5 seconds* and the vehicle will
honk the horn and flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and the front position
lights once, then the lights will illuminate
and remain illuminated, indicating that the
engine is running. While the vehicle is
operating via the remote engine start
function, the power window features will
be disabled. Also, the system has a timer
and will shut down after 15 minutes if you
do not operate the vehicle. Press and hold
the “
” button for 2 seconds to turn the
engine off. The remote start confirmation
transmitter button will flash three times*
indicating that the engine has shut down.
If the starter cranks but does not start or
starts and stalls, the remote engine start
system will power off and then attempt to
start the engine an additional three times
unless the remote engine start system
determines that a vehicle malfunction is
preventing the system from starting. If the
engine does not start after additional
attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate
state.
*: Provided that the remote engine start
transmitter is within the operating range of
the system.
& Remote start safety features
For safety and security reasons, the
system will fail to start and honk the horn
twice or shut down the engine during
remote start operati on if any of the
following occur:
. Any of the doors or the trunk / rear gate
are open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
honk six times and the side marker lights,
tail lights and the front position lights will
flash six times indicating that a vehicle
door or trunk / rear gate was open when
the remote engine start system was
activated).
. The brake pedal is depressed
. The key was already in the ignition
switch
. The engine hood is opened
. The remote start system “Service
mode” is engaged
. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
reached a level over 3,500 RPM
. The alarm is triggered by opening a
door or the rear gate.
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models)
In addition to the items above, if the
Starting and operating 7-11
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-12 Starting and operating
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk
three times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine start activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine start activa-
tion (the security indicator light on the
combination meter is not flashing), the
alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine s tart
system) and the engine will turn off.
Inserting the key into the ignition switch
and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “
” on the
remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
system” F2-15.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn to the “START” position to restart
the engine.
& Remote start confirmation
transmitter feature
Your remote engine start transmitter is
equipped with a unique bidirectional con-
firmation feature. This feature will allow
the transmitter’s backlit button to display
the status of the system under the condi-
tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Transmitter flash sequence Feature description
Flashes when button is
pressed
Indicates that the system is transmitting an RF signal.
Two long flashes following re-
mote start activation (transmit-
ter button is pressed two times
within 3 seconds)
Indicates that the transmitter did not receive the remote start
activation confirmation from the vehicle system. The transmitter
will automatically send one additional remote start activation
attempt. This usually occurs when the operational range is at its
limit or has been exceeded.
One flash following remote
start activation (transmitter
button is pressed two times
within 3 seconds)
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the
transmitter is moved outside of the operating range of the
system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute
vehicle run cycle.
2 flashes every 5 seconds
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the
transmitter is removed outside of the operating range of the
system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute
vehicle run cycle.
3 flashes
Indicates that the engine has turned off due to a remote start
system 15-minute timeout, vehicle safety parameter or normal
shutdown.
& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
down
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Models with automatic climate control
system:
After the system starts the engine, the
automatic climate control system will
activate the “FULL AUTO” mode and heat
or cool the interior to the predetermined
median (room) temperature. No pre-
setting of controls is necessary.
Models with manual climate control
system:
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (278,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-14 Starting and operating
& Service mode
In service mode, the remote engine start
function is temporarily disabled to prevent
the system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
To engage or disengage service mode:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
doors and the trunk/rear gate.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models)
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position
5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter “
” button three times.
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn
each time the button is pressed.
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to
indicate that the service mode has been
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
& Remote transmitter program
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, then
back to “ON” again and leave the ignition
“ON” throughout the programming pro-
cess.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and front position lights
and honk the horn three times, indicating
that the system has entered the transmit-
ter learn mode.
5. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and front position lights
and honk the horn one time, indicating that
the system has learned the transmitter.
Upon successful programming, the re-
mote start confirmation transmitter button
will flash one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK” position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes.
& System maintenance
NOTE
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle
a minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the batteries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitt er when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
Black plate (279,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; chil dren could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine
start transmitter should last approximately
one year, depending on usage. When the
batteries begin to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter bat-
teries.
1. Remove the small Phillips type screw
located on the back side lower left corner
of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
batteries and replace with new ones. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
batteries before removing them to ensure
that the new batteries are inserted prop-
erly (battery “+” should be pointed away
from the transmitter circuit board on both
batteries).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the Phillips type screw
and test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
Starting and operating 7-15
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-16 Starting and operating
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF expo-
sure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
or the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure require-
ments and void user’sauthorityto
operate the device.
Manual transmission
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
relea se the clutch pedal) sud-
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
The manual transmission is a fully syn-
chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
& Selecting reverse gear
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that
position before you can move the shift
lever to the “R” position.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th
50 (80)
! Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
lowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ-
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is requi red, th e vehicl e
should not be driven with the tachometer ’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive eng ine wear and poor fuel
economy.
mph (km/h)
Gear
Legacy
Outback
Non-turbo
models
Turbo
models
1st 32 (52) 35 (56) 32 (52)
2nd 57 (92) 62 (100) 57 (92)
3rd 86 (138) 94 (151) 86 (139)
4th 114 (184) 125 (201)
115 (185)
NOTE
Never exceed posted speed limits.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
Starting and operating 7-17
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-18 Starting and operating
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downg rades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
Automatic transmission/Con-
tinuously variable transmis-
sion
The automatic transmission is electroni-
cally controlled and provides 5 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. The con-
tinuously variable transmission is electro-
nically controlled and provides an infinite
number of forward speeds and 1 reverse
speed.
Both the a utomatic transmission and
continuously variable transmission have
a manual mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the
“R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the select
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
NOTE
. For AT models, when the engine
coolant temperature is still low, the
transmission will upshift to higher
engine speeds than when the coolant
temperature is sufficiently high in order
to shorten the warm-u p time and
improve driveability. The gearshift tim-
ing will automatically shift to the nor-
Black plate (283,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
mal timing after the engine has warmed
up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission ope ration is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a vehicle that is
equipped with CVT under continuous
heavy load conditions such as towing a
camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the engine speed or the vehicle speed
may automatically be reduced. This is
not a malfunction. This phenomenon
results from the engine control func-
tion maintaining the cooling p erfor-
mance of the vehicle. The engine and
vehicle speed will return to a normal
speed when the engine is able to
maintain the optimum cooling perfor-
mance after the heavy load decreases.
Driving under a heavy load must be
performed with extreme care. Do not
try to pass a vehicle in front when
driving on an uphill slope while towing.
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that
provides superior transmission effi-
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At
times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating sound
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
& Select lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the button in
: Shift while pressing the button in
: Shift without pressing the button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate
for using the manual mode.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me-
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle f rom
lurching when it is started.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the “P”
position is selected, the engine is
controlled such that the engine speed
may not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
the vehicle completely then mo ve the
lever to the “R” position.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position the wheels and transmis-
sion are not locked. In this position, the
Starting and operating 7-19
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (284,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-20 Starting and operating
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the tra nsmission
neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine brak-
ing effect.
NOTE
. To protect the engine while the “N”
position is selected, the engine is
controlled such that the engine speed
may not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
. If the select lever is in the “N”
position when you stop the engine for
parking, you may not subsequently be
able to move it to the “R” and “P”
positions. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position.
You will then be able to move the select
lever to the “P” position.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission automatically shifts into a
suitable gear acc ording to the vehicle
speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
When you release the pedal, the transmis-
sion will return to the original gear posi-
tion.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
NOTE (AT models only)
Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd may
occur even when driving on a level
road depending on conditions, such as
how hard you depress the brake pedal.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and
downshifting resulting in a smoother op-
eration of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, de-
pending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “Acc” position to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position while the select lever is in
the “N” position, the select lever may not
be moved to the “P” position after a period
of time. Therefore, move the select lever
to the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed soon after the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
Black plate (285,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-21.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “Acc” position, move the
select lever to the “ P” position with the
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-21.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Remove the shift lock cover using a
flat-head screwdriver.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the electronic parking brake release
tool into the hole, press the shift lock
release button using the tool, and then
move the select lever.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the shift lock
cover, cover the tip of the flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth
before removing the cover.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
Starting and operating 7-21
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (286,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-22 Starting and operating
& Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range
(AT models) or 1st-to-6th gear range (CVT
models). The upshift and downshift indi-
cators show when a gearshift is possible.
When the upshift indicator “
” is on,
upshifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator “
” is on, downshifting is possi-
ble. When both indicators are on, upshift-
ing and downshifting are both possible.
When the vehicle stops (for example, at
traffic signals), the downshift indicator
turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
paddle shift switch behind the steering
wheel.
Pull the “+ ” of the paddle shift to upshift
one level. Also pull the “−” of the paddle
shift to downshift one level.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
While driving with the select lever in the
“D” position, if you change gears by
paddle shifting, the gear position indicator
light illuminates and shows the current
gear condition.
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on
the paddle shift levers. Doing so
may result in accidental gear shift-
ing.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the paddle switch twice in rapid suc-
cession.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
& Driving tips
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 2.5 L turbo or
3.6 L engine before the engine warms up.
Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
The power steering system operates only
when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja-
cent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
Starting and operating 7-23
7
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-24 Starting and operating
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking dis-
tance will increase.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the b rake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
youaredrivingwithanABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road sur-
faces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
& ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating sound of
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
system being carried out and does not
indicate any abnormal condition.
Starting and operating 7-25
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-26 Starting and operating
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off after approximately 2
seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
when the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds approximately 12 km/h
(8 mph).
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
– The warning light flashes.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning l ight is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
. When the warning light is flash-
ing, the ABS system may be
malfunctioning. However, t he
conventional brake system con-
tinues to operate normally.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its func-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD
system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-28.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Dri ve carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
Starting and operating 7-27
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-28 Starting and operating
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
ious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control s ystem is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the sam e for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the specified tem-
porary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
spare tire, the effectiveness of
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vati on of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
NOTE
. Slight twitching of the brake pedal
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system operates; a small de-
gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-
ing may also be noticed in this situa-
tion. These are normal characteristics
of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
and are no cause for alarm.
. When driving off immediately after
starting the engine, a short-lived opera-
tion noise may be noticed coming from
the engine compartment. This noise is
generated as a result of a check being
performed on the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and is normal.
. Depending on the timing of activa-
tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may
seem to jolt when you drive off after
starting the engine. This is a conse-
quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operational check and is normal.
. In the circumstances shown in the
following list, the vehicle may be more
unstable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
therefore operate. Such operation does
not indicate a system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. Even if the vehicle is equipped with
a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
is important that winter tires be used
when driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size and brand.)
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. All four wheels should be fitted with
tires of the same size, type, and brand;
furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four tires. If
these precautions are not obser ved
and non-matching tires are used, it is
quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system will be unable
to operate correctly as intended.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
Starting and operating 7-29
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (294,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-30 Starting and operating
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control op-
eration indicator light
The light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off several seconds after the engine
has started. This lighting pattern indicates
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
is operating normally.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system controls each brake
through the ABS, whenever the ABS
stops operating due to a malfunc-
tion in that electrical system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control will also
become unable to control all four
brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics
Control system operation halts and
the warning light illuminates.
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and the ABS will be
inoperable in this situation, it will
still be possible to stop the vehicle
using normal braking. The Vehicle
Dynamics Control system and the
ABS do not adversely affect opera-
tion of the vehicle in any way when
they are inoperable. However
should such a situation occur, drive
with care and have an authorized
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspec-
tion of those systems at the first
available opportunity.
NOTE
. When a malfunction has occurred in
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical
system, only the warning light will
illuminate. In such an event, the ABS
will still be operating normally.
. The warning light will also illuminate
when a problem occurs with the ABS or
Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic
control systems.
The following situations could indicate a
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. If any of these situations
occur, have an authorized SUBARU deal-
er carry out an inspection of the system at
the first available opportunity.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven.
NOTE
When the warning light turns on and off
in the following way, it indicates that
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
is operating normally.
. Although illuminating after the en-
gine has been started, the warning light
quickly turns off and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, it then turns
off and remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
Black plate (295,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
NOTE
. The indicator light may remain illu-
minated for a while after the engine has
been started, especially in cold weath-
er. This occurs because the engine has
not yet warmed up and is completely
normal. The light will turn off when the
engine has reached a suitable operat-
ing temperature.
. When an engine problem occurs
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator lamp illuminates,
the indicator light will also illuminate.
The following two situations could indicate
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. If either of these situa-
tions occurs, have an authorized
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection
of that system at the first available
opportunity.
. The indicator light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
. The indicator light fails to turn off after
the engine is started, even when several
minutes have passed to allow the engine
to heat up sufficiently.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
dicator light
The light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The following two situations could indicate
a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. If either should occur,
have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
out an inspection of that system at the first
available opportunity.
. The indicator light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
. The indicator light does not turn off
approximately 2 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned to the ON position.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
Pressing the switch to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control s ystem can
facilitate the following operations.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Starting and operating 7-31
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (296,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-32 Starting and operating
Control system will be deactivated. When
the switch is pressed again to reactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is abso-
lutely necessary. If you must turn off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically r eacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any fur ther pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and restart the en-
gine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
formance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely neces-
sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light illuminates.
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
Black plate (297,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates w hile driving, never
brake suddenly and keep drivi ng
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on t he tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before adjusting
their pressures to the standard
values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-33.
The tire pressure monitoring system
does not function when the vehicle
is stationary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function prop-
erly.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Starting and operating 7-33
7
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-34 Starting and operating
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do no t p ark the veh icle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
& Electronic parking brake
1) Parking brake switch
2) Hill Holder switch
3) Indicator light
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake
may be released and an accident
may occur.
. If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately st op your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction
and the parking brake cannot be
applied, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for an inspec-
tion. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, per-
form the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1”
or reverse position (MT mod-
els).
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position (AT or CVT models).
When the select lever cannot
be shifted into the “P” posi-
tion, you must release shift
lock. Refer to “Shift lock func-
tion” F7-20.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never dr ive while the par king
brake is applied because this will
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been released
and the brake system warning
light has turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
press the parking brake switch firmly.
To release: Pull the parking brake switch
toward you while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal (all
models) and the clutch pedal (MT models)
are depressed.
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the brake system warning light and the
indicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning
light” F3-17.
NOTE
. If the parking brake switch is pulled
with the ignition switch in the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position, the parking brake is
not released.
. If the parking brake switch is pulled
without depressing the brake pedal or
the clutch pedal, the parking brake is
not released.
. When the parking brake is being
applied or released, noise may be
noticed. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the elec-
tronic parking brake operation is pro-
hibited temporarily, if the parking brake
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the brake system warning
light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, you can relea se it by
using the parking brake release tool.
Refer to “Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake cannot be
released” F9-16.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The park-
ing brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or
rear gate) is open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the brake system warning light
and the indicator on the parking brake
switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake by pressing the parking brake
switch, the parking brake will be auto-
matically released when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
! Hill Holder function
The electronic parking brake system has a
Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
function is activated, the parking brake
will be automatically applied when stop-
ping on an uphill slope with the brake
pedal depressed. In this case, the brake
system warning light and the indicator light
on the parking brake switch illuminate.
NOTE
. The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
case, manually apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If you do not depress the brake
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-
tion may not operate properly. How-
ever, this is not a malfunction. When
Starting and operating 7-35
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-36 Starting and operating
stopping on an uphill slope, depress
the brake pedal firmly and release it
after the brake system warning light
illuminates.
. Depending on the condition of the
road surface and braking force, the
brakes operate temporarily and feel
different than usual.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the Hill
Holder function is activated, a chirp
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica-
tor light turns off and the brake system
warning light flashes.
. The Hill Holder function does not
reactivate when parking with the elec-
tronic parking brake released after the
Hill Holder function is activated. If
necessary, manually apply the electro-
nic parking brake.
. If the seatbelt is not fastened when
the Hill Holder function is activated, the
vehicle may not start moving smoothly
from a stop, or a noise may be heard
from the brake components.
! Hill Holder switch
WARNING
When stopping on an uphill slope
with the Hill Holder function acti-
vated, release the brake pedal after
the brake system warning light has
illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill
Holder function may not operate
properly and an accident may occur.
1) Parking brake switch
2) Hill Holder switch
3) Indicator light
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
switch again.
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer
. When carrying a heavy load
. When you do not frequently use the
parking brake when stopping on an uphill
slope
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for mo re than 30 seconds, the Hill
Holder indicator light turns off, the
brake system warning light flashes
and the system ignores any further
pressing of the switch. To activate the
switch again, turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position and restart the
engine.
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tion has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
! Hill Holder indicator light
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
When the Hill Holder function is activated,
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-19.
! Emergency brake
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used,
the brake parts will wear down
faster or the brake may not work
sufficiently due to rear wheel brake
overheating.
NOTE
While using the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the
indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pressing the
parking brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the in-
dicator on the parking brake switch illumi-
nate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
flashes, the electronic parking brake
system may be malfunctioning. Im-
mediately stop your vehicle in the
nearest safe location and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light flashes. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake system warning” F3-19.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “ R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
. For AT and CVT models, put the select
lever in the “P” (Park) position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
Starting and operating 7-37
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-38 Starting and operating
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
Cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. Make sure the “CRUISE” main
switch is turned off when the cruise
control is not in use to avoid uninten-
tionally setting of the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
1. Press the “CRUISE” main switch
button.
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. S imply de press the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
. Press the “CANCEL” button.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
only).
. Shi ft the select lever i nto the “N”
position (AT and CVT models).
. Shift the shift lever into the neutral
position (MT models only).
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
Starting and operating 7-39
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-40 Starting and operating
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET ”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter will automatically illu-
minate at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the “CRUISE” main switch but-
ton again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“RES” side quickly.
Canada-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
increased 1 km/h each time by pressing
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side
quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress th e accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desi red
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
NOTE
. U.S.-spec. models
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the button is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
cruise control system regards this
operation as that intended to decrease
the vehicle speed.
. Canada-spec. models
If the difference between the actual
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
vehicle speed when the but ton is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
occurs because the cruise control
system regards this operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle
speed.
! To decrease the speed (by the
“RES/SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side quickly.
Canada-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RE S/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed , press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and turns off after
approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed.
NOTE
. If y ou press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
Starting and operating 7-41
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
7-42 Starting and operating
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
The cruise control set indicator light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6
Legacy................................................................ 8-6
Outback .............................................................. 8-6
Winter driving...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
(Outback) ........................................................ 8-14
Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) .............. 8-16
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-18
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-19
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19
Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-19
Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-23
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24
Driving tips
8
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoi d star ting suddenly an d rapi d
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or w hen brake pads or brake
linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO ga uge
shows a reference for saving fuel. For
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-8.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or
rear gate (Outback) closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flam mable materi als (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and f lammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L non-turbo models
2.5 L turbo models
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
Driving tips 8-3
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-4 Driving tips
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combust ion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or r ust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
. Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.
Black plate (313,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – ove rconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during accelera-
tion, and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in ha ndling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, circumference,
construction, brand, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes, circumferences or
construction may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion, and clearance between the body
and tires. It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored in the
vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located on the door
pillar on the driver’s side.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-12.
Driving tips 8-5
8
Black plate (314,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – ove rconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
& Legacy
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature g ives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc-
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under wa rranty. If you do t ake y our
SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the Outback) for
genera l guidance. But please keep in
mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil-
ities are more limited than those of the
Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Outback
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But
please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is
neither a conventional off-road vehicle
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as those in the
following list should be taken:
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with yo ur fingers and th umbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The
water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-
riage. Water entering the engine air intake
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your
Black plate (315,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
attempt to drive through rushing water;
regardless of its depth, it can wash away
the ground from under your tires, resulting
in possible loss of traction and even
vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not dri ve or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and righ t after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carr ied inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
select lever back and forth between “1”/
“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT, AT and CVT).
For AT and CVT models, refer to “Selec-
tion of manual mode” F7-22.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the mainte nance schedule
described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
not using common se nse preca utions
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage.
Driving tips 8-7
8
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer
oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100%
−498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outsid e
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive . Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow t hat h as
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
Do not use t he parking brake w hen
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT
models, or the select lever in “P” for AT
models and CVT models.
2. Use t ire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
ness.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose . When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
Driving tips 8-9
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-10 Driving tips
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your v ehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy ro ads. Fo r
information about braking on slippe ry
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-25 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-28.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are f rozen t o the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
use the defroster with the airflow selection
in “
” and the temperature set for
maximum warmth until the wiper blades
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate
control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
ger and deicer” F3-34.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
and deicer” F3-34.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for ma ximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” F3-33.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to al ert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-5.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high -speed driving , non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only the same size,
construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speed-
ometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and
tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, circum-
ferences, construction, brand,
andloadrange.Mixingother
sizes, circumferences or con-
structions may result in severe
mechanical damage to the drive
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
train of your vehicle and may
affect ride, handling, braking and
speedometer/odometer calibra -
tion. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol.
. Do not use a combi nation of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
! Except 2.5 L turbo models
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifica lly for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
! 2.5 L turbo models
Your vehicle is equipped with “summer
tires” as original equipment, which are
inadequate for driving on slippery roads
such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
Compared with winter and all-season
tires, summer tires give significantly less
grip on snowy and icy road surfaces.
Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly
recommended when driving with s uch
road conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on any
tires for your Legacy and Outback
because of lack of clearance be-
tween the tires and vehicle body.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (for MT, AT and CVT).
For information on holding the transmis-
sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-22.
Driving tips 8-11
8
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-12 Driving tips
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
in the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(Legacy) or the extended luggage
cover (Outback). Such items
could tumble forward in the event
of a sudden stop or a collision.
This could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to t he
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Driving tips 8-13
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (322,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof rails with integrated
crossbars (Outback)
1) Integrated crossbars
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
bars must be used as crossbars
and be used together with the
genuine SUBARU carrying at-
tachment. The bars must never
be used alone to carry cargo.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or
paint or a dangerous road hazard
due to loss of cargo could result.
. When using the bars as cross-
bars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
The bars can be used as crossbars.
Cargo can be carried after setting the
bars as crossbars a nd installing the
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the crossbars and a carrying attachment,
never exceed the maximum load limit
explained in the following. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
maximum load limit of the cargo and
carrying attachment must not exceed the
allowable load limit described in the Own-
er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry-
ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at
the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Al ways pr operly
secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
genuine SUBARU attachments. A set of
the crossbars is designed to carry loads
(cargo and attachment) of not more than
the allowable load limit described in the
Owner’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU
carrying attachment. Before operating the
vehicle, make sure that the cargo is
properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicle’s center
of gravity is altered with the weight of
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the origi nal
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
Black plate (323,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! How to use as crossbars
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be da-
maged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar.
The base of the bar may be
damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof pa nel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be
dented or the glass of the moon-
roof may be damaged.
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from
the roof rail holders by pulling up the
covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
3. Install the bars into the holders.
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
! How to re-stow bars
CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.
Driving tips 8-15
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (324,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-16 Driving tips
1. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail
holders by pulling up the covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
3. Install the bars into the holders.
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
Trailer hitch (Outback — if
equipped)
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-19.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the t railer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
Black plate (325,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
could g et loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class
1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer
weight and maximum gross tongue weight
are indicated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
3.6 L models
3,000 lbs
(1,360 kg)
200 lbs
(90 kg)
All models
other than 3.6
L models
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing” F8-19.
& Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin
securely.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
Driving tips
8-17
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-18 Driving tips
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& When you do not tow a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Trail er towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appr opriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipme nt, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (en-
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never excee d the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are accepta-
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight.
! Legacy
The total trailer weight must not exceed
1,000 lbs (453 kg).
! Outback
The maximum total trailer weight is in-
dicated in the following tables.
Driving tips 8-19
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-20 Driving tips
3.6 L models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
All models other than 3.6 L models
Model Conditions
Maximum total trailer
weight
MT models
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
CVT models
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8
km) with an outside temperature of
1048F (408C) or above.
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver ’s door of your
vehicle.
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing corne ring, res ulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
Driving tips 8-21
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-22 Driving tips
NOTE
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value
is 200 lbs (90 kg).
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following
illust ration. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing
coupler at the height at which it would be
during actual towing, us ing a jack as
shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
& Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
trailer.
! Outback
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
sional h itch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
! Legacy
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch
supplier to assist you in choosing an
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tight.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped wi th its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes a re
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regul ations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should discon-
nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight turn
situations into account; however, be care-
ful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
for your hitch and trailer.
Driving tips 8-23
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-24 Driving tips
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct spli cing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehi cle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the brake
lights each time you hitch up.
! Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
porary spare tire is used. The tem-
porary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
7 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
the end of this manual.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer i n hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer ’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
ated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
erations. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, always start out in first gear
and release the clutch at moderate engine
revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the tra iler could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
erable distance is required because of the
added w eight and len gth ca used by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
Driving tips 8-25
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (334,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8-26 Driving tips
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the coolant temperature high
warning light (for all models) and AT OIL
TEMP warning light (for AT and CVT
models) because the engine and trans-
mission are relatively prone to overheating
under these conditions. If the coolant
temperature high warning light and/or the
AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. For further instructions and addi-
tional information, refer to the following
sections.
–“If you park your vehicle in an
emergency” F9-2
–“Engine overheating” F9-12
–“Coolant temperature low indicator
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” F3-13
–“AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
CVT models)” F3-15
. For AT and CVT models, avoid using
the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
an uphill slope instead o f using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake. You should not park on
a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” (AT and CVT models) and
shut off the engine.
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3
Legacy................................................................ 9-4
Outback .............................................................. 9-5
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-9
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10
How to jump start............................................... 9-10
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-12
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-12
Towing ................................................................ 9-12
Towing and tie-down hooks/holes ...................... 9-13
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-15
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15
Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released................. 9-16
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot
be opened ....................................................... 9-18
Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate
cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-19
Moonroof – if moonroof cannot be closed ...... 9-19
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an
emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following precautions.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Electronic parking brake release tool
In case of emergency 9-3
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (338,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-4 In case of emergency
& Legacy
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
F6-18.)
2) Electronic parking brake release tool
3) Jack handle
4) Spare tire
5) Tool bucket
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
The jack handle is stored on the back of
the floor cover of the trunk. The electronic
parking brake release tool is stored under
the floor of the trunk. The other tools are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
Black plate (339,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Outback
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
F6-18.)
2) Electronic parking brake release tool
3) Jack handle
4) Spare tire
5) Tool bucket
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
The jack handle is stored under the cargo
area. The electronic parking brake release
tool is stored under the floor of the cargo
area. The other tools are stored in the tool
bucket that is located in the recess of the
spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
In case of emergency 9-5
9
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-6 In case of emergency
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a serious
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the
select lever in the “P” (Park) position (AT
and CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
nance tools” F9-3.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
Legacy
Black plate (341,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Outback
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F 9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
In case of emergency 9-7
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (342,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-8 In case of emergency
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-7. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment.
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching
bolt firmly.
Also store the jack and jack handle in their
storage locations.
Black plate (343,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any ti re liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
In case of emergency 9-9
9
Black plate (344,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-10 In case of emergency
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid g ets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid h as
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obta in immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair a nd tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing ring s, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
Black plate (345,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When fin ished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
In case of emergency 9-11
9
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-12 In case of emergency
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-17.
1. Keep the en gine r unni ng at id ling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”
F11-7.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the coolant temperature high warning
light illuminates, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (including
AT, MT and CVT) with the front
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on
the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to th e
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe t he foll owing
procedures for safety.
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Towing and tie-down hooks/
holes
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole clo-
sest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the towing hook and screw-
driver from the on board tool bucket. Take
out the jack handle from the trunk (Le-
gacy) or cargo area (Outback).
2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
In case of emergency 9-13
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-14 In case of emergency
Rear towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of
the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Out-
back).
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
Front tie-down hooks:
The f ront tie-down hooks a re located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position for AT and CVT models or the
shift lever into “1st” for MT models.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
In case of emergency 9-15
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (350,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-16 In case of emergency
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. Fo r AT and CVT models, the
traveling speed must be limited
to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
the traveling distance to less
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater
speeds and distances, transport
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake
cannot be released
WARNING
. When the electronic parking
brake ca nnot be released, the
electronic parking brake system
may malfunction. Driving in such
conditions may cause an unex-
pected accident. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for inspection
as soon as possible.
. You can release the electronic
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool
in case of an emergency. How-
ever, after releasing the electro-
nic parking brake by using the
electronic parking brake release
tool, contact your SUBARU deal-
er for inspection as soon as
possible.
. Release the electronic parking
brakebyusingtheelectronic
parking brake release tool on a
level road. Otherwise, the vehicle
may move, which could cause an
accident.
. When re leasing the electronic
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool,
always perform the following
items.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1”
or “R” position (MT models).
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position (AT and CVT models).
– Use tire stops under the tires.
. When re leasing the electronic
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Otherwise, the electronic parking
brake system may operate and
the electronic parking brake re-
lease tool may rotate and unex-
pected accident may occur.
CAUTION
. Under certain weather conditions
(rain, snow, sandstorm, etc.), do
not release the electronic parking
brakebyusingtheelectronic
parking brake release tool. If
water or dust enters the device,
the device may malfunction.
Black plate (351,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. If the cap cannot be removed,
contact your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
. After releasing the electronic
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the cap is rein-
stalled to the parking brake re-
lease device. If the cap is not
reinstalled, water or dust enters
the device and the device may
malfunction.
NOTE
It may be difficult to release the elec-
tronic parking brake by using the
electronic parking brake release tool.
Have your SUBARU dealer release the
electronic parking brake if necessary.
In the event that you cannot release the
electronic parking brake by pulling the
electronic parking br ake switch or b y
depressing the accelerator pedal, you
can release the electronic parking brake
manually by using the electronic parking
brake release tool.
1. Shift the shift lever in the “1” or “R”
position (MT models) or the select lever in
the “P” position (AT and CVT models).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
3. Make sure that the brake system
warning light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch have turned off.
4. Use t ire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
5. Take out the electronic parking brake
release tool. Refer to “Maintenance tools”
F9-3.
6. Insert the electronic parking brake
release tool into the cap of the parking
brake release device.
7. Remove the cap of the parking brake
release device by turning the electronic
parking brake release tool counterclock-
In case of emergency 9-17
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (352,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-18 In case of emergency
wise.
8. Break the white film and insert the
electronic parking brake release tool into
the parking brake release device.
9. Turn the electronic parking brake
release tool clockwise approximately 200
to 250 rotations.
10. To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is released, shift the shift lever or
the select lever to the “N” position, slightly
move the tire stops and have someone
push the vehicle slightly while you remain
in the driver’s seat. If the vehicle moves,
the electronic parking brake has been
released.
11. Readjust the tire stops.
12. Reinstall the cap to the parking brake
release device.
CAUTION
. Do not turn the electronic parking
brake release tool counterclock-
wise or turn it around more than
300 times. Doing so may result in
a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
. Do not use electric power tools to
turn the electronic parking brake
release tool. Doing so may result
in a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the
trunk lid cannot be opened
The trunk lid can also be opened using the
key.
To open the trunk lid, insert the key into
the key cylinder and turn it clockwise.
Black plate (353,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Rear gate (Outback) – if the
rear gate cannot be unlocked
In the event that you cannot unlock the
rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches or the remote keyless
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver
or a similar tool.
3. To unlock the rear gate, turn the lever
to the right position using a flat-head
screwdriver or a similar tool.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Moonroof – if moonroof can-
not be closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the
moonroof switch, you can close the moon-
roof manually.
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bucket.
2. Open the overhead console. Refer to
“Overhead console” F6-8.
3. Remove the two screws that retain the
moonroof switch body. Then, remove the
moonroof switch.
In case of emergency 9-19
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (354,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
9-20 In case of emergency
4. Insert the hex-head wrench in the end
of the motor shaft.
To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench
clockwise.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interi or.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5
Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................ 10-6
Appearance care
10
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air in-
take, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid res ervoir, it will
cause engine trouble or a mal-
function of the power steering.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
equipped with a rear wiper, auto-
matic car-wash brushes could
become tangled around it, dama-
ging the wiper arm and other
components. Ask the automatic
car-wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car was h is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor ha rnesses, and
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a mo nth, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarser grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
acompoundoranincorrectpolishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
list.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax w ith organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
num whe els) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care 10-3
10
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corro-
sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-
tion.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regu larly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of t he
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabri c surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrin kles, which is characteristi c of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as
paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
cleaning a gents that contain th ose
solvents.
Appearance care 10-5
– CONTINUED –
10
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
10-6 Appearance care
& Navigation monitor (if
equipped)
To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it
with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If
the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
NOTE
. Do not spray neutral detergent di-
rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could
damage the monitor’s components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard
cloth. Doing so could scratch the
monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-
tains thinner, gasoline, or any other
volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid
could erase the let tering on the
switches at the bottom of the monitor.
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment (2.5 L non-turbo models) ............. 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5
Removing and reinstalling clips.......................... 11-5
Removing air intake duct.................................... 11-7
Pulling off the fender lining ................................ 11-7
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-9
2.5 L non-turbo models ...................................... 11-9
2.5 L turbo models ........................................... 11-10
3.6 L models .................................................... 11-11
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-12
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-12
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-14
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-16
Cooling system ................................................ 11-16
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-17
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-17
Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-19
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-20
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-22
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-22
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-22
Manual transmission oil.................................. 11-23
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-23
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-24
Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-24
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-25
Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-25
Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT
models).......................................................... 11-26
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-26
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-26
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-27
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-27
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-27
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-27
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-28
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-28
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-28
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-29
Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-29
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-29
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-30
Brake booster .................................................. 11-30
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-31
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-31
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-31
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-31
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-31
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-32
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Maintenance and service
Replacement of bra ke pad and lining............. 11-32
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings........ 11-32
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-33
Types of tires ................................................... 11-33
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)................................................... 11-33
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-35
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-35
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-37
Wear indicators................................................ 11-37
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-38
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-38
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-39
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-39
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-40
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-40
Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-41
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-42
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-42
Rear window wiper blade assembly
(Outback) ....................................................... 11-43
Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ....... 11-44
Battery .............................................................. 11-45
Fuses ................................................................ 11-46
Main fuse.......................................................... 11-48
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-48
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-48
Headlight......................................................... 11-48
Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-51
Front position light .......................................... 11-51
Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-51
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-52
Tail/Back-up light (Outback) ............................. 11-54
License plate light ........................................... 11-55
Dome light....................................................... 11-56
Map light ......................................................... 11-57
Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-57
Door step light................................................. 11-58
Cargo area light (Outback) ............................... 11-58
Trunk light (Legacy) ......................................... 11-58
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-58
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
For details about your maintenance sche-
dule, read the separate “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-W heel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or all ow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (364,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for these wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
thecoolingfanmayoperate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
(2.5 L non-turbo models)
CAUTION
Do not contact the belt cover while
checking the components in the
engine compartment. Doing so may
cause your hand to slip off the belt
cover and result in an unexpected
injury.
Black plate (365,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and an y other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Maintenance tips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling
clips
! Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
! Type B clips
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
Maintenance and service 11-5
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (366,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-6 Maintenance and service
! Type C clips
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Reinstalling clips
Type A clips
Type B clips
Type C clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
Black plate (367,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Removing air intake duct
Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the
air intake duct, then remove the air intake
duct. Refer to “ Type A clips” F11-5.
& Pulling off the fender lining
It is necessary to pull off the fender lining
when replacing some bulbs.
1. Start the engine and turn the steering
wheel fully in the opposite direction of the
bulb to be replaced.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the clip from the fender lining.
Refer to “Type B clips” F11-5.
4. Pull off the fender lining.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Maintenance and service 11-7
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (368,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-8 Maintenance and service
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it . It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always ch eck that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while t he vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Black plate (369,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Engine compartment overview
& 2.5 L non-turbo models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-27)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28)
5) Fuse box (page 11-46)
6) Battery (page 11-45)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-40)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-17)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-17)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-12)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)
Maintenance and service
11-9
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (370,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-10 Maintenance and service
& 2.5 L turbo models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-27)
2) Manual transmi ssion oil l evel gauge
(page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28)
5) Fuse box (page 11-46)
6) Battery (page 11-45)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-40)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-17)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-17)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-12)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)
Black plate (371,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& 3.6 L models
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-27)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge
(page 11-26)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-24)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28)
5) Fuse box (page 11-46)
6) Battery (page 11-45)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-40)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-17)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-17)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-12)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)
Maintenance and service
11-11
11
Black plate (372,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-12 Maintenance and service
Engine oil
NOTE
. When the engine low oil level warn-
ing light illuminates, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has tra-
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tionedintheWarrantyandMainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
tim e, and change the oil more fre-
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de-
tails.
. If the oil consumption rate seems
abnormally high after the break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops with the graphic
symbol “
” on its top appearing as
shown in the illustration.
Black plate (373,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2.5 L models
1) Notch
2) Full level
3) Low level
4) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
3.6 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
low level (L), add oil to bring the level up to
the full level (F).
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
. In 2.5 L engine models, the level
gauge has a notch above the upper
level. Just after driving or while the
engine is warm, the engine oil level
reading may be in a range between the
upper level and the notch mark. This is
caused by thermal expansion of the
engine oil.
Maintenance and service 11-13
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (374,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-14 Maintenance and service
& Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter m ust be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when dri ving in
extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
2.5 L non-turbo models
2.5 L turbo models
3.6 L models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface and around
the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing
washer after the oil has completely
drained out.
2.5 L non-turbo models
Black plate (375,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
2.5 L turbo models
3.6 L models
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench.
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to
twist or damage the seal.
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount
indicated in the following table after the
seal makes contact with the bottom of
engine.
Model
Oil filter
color
Part
number
Amount of
rotation
2.5 L
models
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation
Blue 15208AA12A
7/8
rotation
3.6 L
models
Black 15208AA031
3/4
rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If left unremoved, the oil could
catch fire.
10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
“Lubricants” F12-4. The necessary quan-
tity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that
has been drained. The quantity of drained
oil differs slightly depending on the tem-
perature of the oil and the time the oil is
left flowing out. After refilling the engine
with oil, therefore, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
12. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
seal and drain plug.
13. Keep the engine idling until the engine
reaches the normal operating temperature
range, as indicated by the temperature
gauge on the combination meter. After
that, check the engine oil level again. For
further details about the check procedure,
refer to “Checking the oil level” F11-12.
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (376,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-16 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted w ith another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
Black plate (377,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
warning light illuminates, the cooling fan
circuit may be defective. Check the fuse
and replace it if necessary. Refer to
“Fuses” F11-46 and “Fuses and circuits”
F12-9. If the fuse is not blown, have the
cooling system checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
Always add genuine SUBARU cooling
system conditioner whenever the coolant
is replaced.
Change the engine coolant and add
Maintenance and service 11-17
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (378,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-18 Maintenance and service
genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner using t he following procedures
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
1. Remove the under cover.
2.5 L models
1) Drain plug
3.6 L models
1) Drain plug
2. Place a proper container under the
drain plug and loosen the drain plug.
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the
coolant from the radiator. Then drain the
coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the
drain plug securely.
4. Install the under cover.
1) Fill up to here
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to
just below the filler neck, allowing enough
room to add genuine SUBARU cooling
system conditioner in the radiator. Add
genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner until the coolant level reaches the
filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too
quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Black plate (379,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
NOTE
For guidelines on cool ant quantity
(including the coolant in the reservoir
tank), refer to “Engine coolant” F12-6.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-
voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.
7. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that
the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is
correctly in place.
8. Start and race the engine at 2,000 to
3,000 rpm for 5 to 6 times within 40
seconds.
9. Stop the engine and wait until the
coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to
608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add
coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to
the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap
back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-
ment.
Maintenance and service 11-19
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (380,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-20 Maintenance and service
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
1) Hydraulic hose
2) Connector
3) Connector cable
4) Clamp
5) Clips
1. Remove the hydraulic hose in the
power steering system from the clip on
the right side of the air cleaner case.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
3. To remove the connector cable from
the air cleaner case, remove the clip that
is attached to the connector cable from the
guide lug on the right side of the air
cleaner case.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp.
5. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
6. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
Black plate (381,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
8. To install the air cleaner case, insert
the three projections on the air cleaner
case into the slits on the air cleaner case
cover.
9. Install the removed or loosened parts
in the reverse order of removal.
! Turbo models
1) Air intake duct
2) Air cleaner case
3) Clamp
1. Remove the hydraulic hose in the
power steering system from the clip on
the air intake duct.
2. Remove the hydraulic hose from the
clip on the right side of the air cleaner
case.
3. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air
cleaner case cover.
4. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
Maintenance and service 11-21
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (382,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-22 Maintenance and service
6. If the air cleaner case has been
removed, insert the three projections on
the air cleaner case into the slits on the air
cleaner case cover.
7. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
& Recommended spark plugs
Refer to “Electrical system” F12-7.
Drive belts
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (383,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Manual transmission oil
& Checking the oil level
Non-turbo models
1) Yellow handle
Turbo models
1) Yellow handle
Check the oil level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil through the level
gauge hole to bring the level up to the
upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual trans-
mission oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-23
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (384,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-24 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-5.
Automatic transmission fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the select lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the
Black plate (385,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6.
NOTE
Using any non-specified type of auto-
matic transmission fluid could result in
damage inside the transmission. When
replacing the automatic transmission
fluid, be sure to use the specified type.
Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid
There is no fluid level gauge. It is
unnecessary to check the continuously
variable transmission fluid level. However,
if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
Maintenance and service 11-25
11
Black plate (386,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-26 Maintenance and service
Front differential gear oil
(AT and CVT models)
& Checking the oil level
! AT models
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
! CVT models
There is no oil level gauge. To check the
front differential gear oil level, we recom-
mend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands t ogether. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-5.
Black plate (387,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Rear differential gear oil
There is no oil level gauge. To check the
rear differential gear oil level, we recom-
mend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-5.
Power steering fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs acc ordi ng t o flui d t empera ture .
Therefore, the reservoir tank has t wo
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
Maintenance and service 11-27
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (388,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-28 Maintenance and service
tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
mended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for inspection.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6.
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. B rake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. I f brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Check the fluid level monthly.
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use o nly bra ke fluid from a sealed
container.
Black plate (389,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
Maintenance and service 11-29
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (390,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-30 Maintenance and service
& Recommended clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following procedure, have
it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the en gine. Th e pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates prope rly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
When you dep ress the br ake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
Brake assist is not a system that brings
more braking ability to the vehicl e
beyond its breaking capability.
Black plate (391,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free pl ay and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.08 – 0.18 in (2 – 5 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT models)
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check t hat the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
Maintenance and service 11-31
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (392,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-32 Maintenance and service
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.19 – 0.44 in (5 – 11 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
The right front disc brake and the right rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows:
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
The break-in maintenance for the parking
brake linings should be performed at a
SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (393,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle except 2.5 L turbo models are all
season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
The factory-installed tires on your new 2.5
L turbo models are summer tires. Summer
tires are high-speed capability tires best
suited for highway driving under dry
conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: P215/70R16 99S, P225/60R17
98T
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F(−18C)
35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
108F(−128C)
37
(255, 2.55)
35
(240, 2.4)
−108F
(−238C)
39 (270, 2.7)
37 (255, 2.55)
Example:
Tire size: P205/60R16 91V, P215/50R17
90V, P225/50R17 93V, 225/45R18 91W
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Maintenance and service 11-33
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (394,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-34 Maintenance and service
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F(−18C)
36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F(−128C)
38
(265, 2.65)
37
(255, 2.55)
−108F
(−238C)
40 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and k eep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
Black plate (395,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nail s, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach th e curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running perfor-
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
Maintenance and service 11-35
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (396,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-36 Maintenance and service
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steeri ng is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
sumption is also higher.
Black plate (397,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies t he effe cts of roa d su rface
bumps and dips, possibly re sulting in
vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment*
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire wear.
*: The suspension system is designed to hold
each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
the other wheels and to the road) for optimum
straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
mance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tir e incorpora tes a tread we ar
indicator, which becomes vi sible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
Maintenance and service 11-37
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (398,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-38 Maintenance and service
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
ularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has a rotation direction specifica-
tion, the tire rotation direction mark is
placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Veh icles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the applicable illustration each time they
are rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
Black plate (399,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’sground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
WARNING
. All four tires must be the same in
terms of manufacturer, brand
(tread pattern), construction, de-
gree of wear, speed symbol, load
index and size. Mixing tires of
different types, sizes or degrees
of wear can result in damage to
the vehicle’s power train. Use of
different types or sizes of tires
can also dangerously reduce
controllability and braking per-
formance and can lead to an
accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting l oss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Maintenance and service 11-39
11
Black plate (400,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-40 Maintenance and service
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
but the windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates or the supply of washer
fluid runs out, add washer fluid in the tank.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
Black plate (401,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100% −498F(−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is to o low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should b e used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and streak-
ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the
streaks after operating the windshi eld
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
Maintenance and service 11-41
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (402,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-42 Maintenance and service
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind-
shield.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Open the cover
2) Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
1) Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
Black plate (403,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1) Claw
2) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly (Outback)
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
Maintenance and service 11-43
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (404,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-44 Maintenance and service
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber (Outback)
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
Black plate (405,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work-
ing near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk o f sparks,
Maintenance and service 11-45
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (406,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-46 Maintenance and service
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries als o contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
Black plate (407,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
The other one is housed in the engine
compartment.
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compart-
ment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and turn off all electrical acces-
sories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-9.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Maintenance and service 11-47
11
Black plate (408,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-48 Maintenance and service
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt
during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equip-
ment. Check the main fuses if any
electrical component fails to operate (ex-
cept the starter motor) and other fuses are
good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main
fuse. If a main fuse blows aft er it is
replaced, have the electrical system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dea ler
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-13.
& Headlight
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger-
Black plate (409,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs
1. Pull off the fender lining. For details,
refer to “Pulling off the fender lining” F11-
7.
2. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the retainer spring.
5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
spring securely.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the bulb cover.
8. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
fender lining.
Maintenance and service 11-49
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (410,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-50 Maintenance and service
! High beam light bulbs
1. Remove the air intake duct (right-hand
side). For the method to remove the air
intake duct, refer to “Removing air intake
duct” F11-7.
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
(left-hand side).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time , use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
8. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
9. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).
Black plate (411,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Front turn signal light
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Turn over the protective cover of the
engine compartment.
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
3. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
4. After replacing the bulbs, reposition
the protective cover of the engine com-
partment.
& Front position light
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Front fog light (if equipped)
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Pull off the fender lin ing. Refe r to
“Pulling off the fender lining” F11-7.
Maintenance and service 11-51
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (412,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-52 Maintenance and service
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1) For left-hand side
2) For right-hand side
3. Turn the socket clockwise (right-hand
side) or counterclockwise (left-hand side).
4. Pull out the socket.
5. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
fender lining.
& Rear combination lights
! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Turn the knobs of the cover 90
degrees counterclockwise to remove the
cover.
Black plate (413,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Brake/tail and rear side marker light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Back-up light
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.
! Outback
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
Maintenance and service 11-53
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (414,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-54 Maintenance and service
1) Tail and rear side marker light
2) Brake light
3) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
8. Reinstal l t he rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
& Tail/Back-up light (Outback)
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
Black plate (415,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
1) Back-up light
2) Tail light
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& License plate light
! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by re-
moving the 12 clips and the trunk trim
handle.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
Maintenance and service 11-55
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (416,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-56 Maintenance and service
! Outback
1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
6. Tighten the mounting screws.
& Dome light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
Black plate (417,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Map light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Vanity mirror light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
Maintenance and service 11-57
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (418,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
11-58 Maintenance and service
& Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light (Legacy)
1. Push both sides of the light cover, and
then remove the cover by pulling it out.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover.
& Other bulbs
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3
Lubricants.......................................................... 12-4
Fluids ................................................................ 12-6
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-6
Electrical system................................................ 12-7
Tires .................................................................. 12-7
Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-8
Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-9
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................... 12-9
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................. 12-11
Bulb chart......................................................... 12-13
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-16
Specifications
12
Black plate (422,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item
Legacy Outback
2.5 L non-turbo
2.5 L turbo 3.6 L
2.5 L non-turbo
3.6 L
Drive system
AWD
Transmission type
MT CVT MT AT MT CVT AT
Overall length
186.4 (4,735) 188.2 (4,780)
Overall width
71.7 (1,820) 71.7 (1,820)
Overall height
59.3 (1,505)
66.1 (1,680)
*2
65.7 (1,670)
*3
Wheelbase
108.3 (2,750) 107.9 (2,740)
Tread Front
61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550) 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550)
Rear
61.8 (1,570) 61.2 (1,555) 61.8 (1,570) 61.0 (1,550)
Ground clearance
*1
5.9 (150)
8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
*2: Measured when roof rails are used as crossbars
*3: Measured when roof rails are not used as crossbars
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Black plate (423,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Engine
Engine model
EJ253
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255
(2.5 L, DOHC, turbo)
EZ36D
(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 149.94 (2,457) 221.52 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4
1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4
& Fuel
Vehicle model
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Non-turbo models
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI or higher
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Turbo models
Premium unleaded gasoline with 93 AKI or higher*
1
*1: If 93 AKI fuel is not available, refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
Specifications
12-3
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (424,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-4 Specifications
& Lubricants
! Engine oil
Oil grade*
1
or
API classification SM or SN with the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE
CONSERVING”
ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified
with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst
mark)
SAE viscosity No. and applicable
temperature
5W-30 synthetic oil is recommended for
optimum engine performance and protection.
Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is
unavailable.
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may be used
if replenishment is needed, but it should be
changed to 5W-30 synthetic oil at the next oil
change.
Oil capacity*
2
2.5 L non-turbo models 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo models 4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
3.6 L models
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
*1: The recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of its original marks indicated on the oil container.
*2: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter. After refilling the
engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-12.
Black plate (425,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
! Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable
temperature
Oil capacity*
1
– Remarks*
2
Manual transmission oil 3.9 US qt (3.7 liters, 3.3 Imp qt) “Manual transmission oil” F11-23
Front differential gear oil
(AT and CVT models)
1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
“Front differential gear oil (AT and
CVT models)” F11-26
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
“Rear differential gear oil” F11-27
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
Specifications
12-5
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (426,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-6 Specifications
& Fluids
Fluid
Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Automatic transmission fluid (5AT
models)
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
“Automatic transmission fluid”
F11-24
Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models)
Consult your SUBARU dealer. 13.2 US qt (12.5 liters, 11.0 Imp qt)
“Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-25
Power steering fluid
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic
Transmission Fluid
0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt)
· “Power steering” F7-23
· “Power steering fluid” F11-27
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Brake fluid” F11-28
Clutch fluid (MT models)
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
29
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
2.5 L non-turbo models
MT models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
CVT models 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
3.6 L models
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-16.
Black plate (427,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR)
75D23R (12V-52AH)
Alternator
2.5 L models 12V-110A
3.6 L models 12V-130A
Spark plugs
2.5 L non-turbo models SIFR6A11 (NGK)
2.5 L turbo models
SILFR6B8 (NGK)
3.6 L models
SILFR6C11 (NGK)
& Tires
Tire size
P205/60R16
91V
P215/70R16
99S
P225/60R17
98T
P215/50R17
90V
P225/50R17
93V
225/45R18
91W
Wheel size
16 6 6 1/2JJ
16 6 6 1/2J
16 6 6 1/2JJ 17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J 18 6 7 1/2J
Pressure Front
33 psi (230 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa)
Rear
32 psi (220 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa)
Temporary spare
tire
Size T135/80R16 T145/80R17 T135/80R16 T135/70R17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa)
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
1
*
2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.
Specifications
12-7
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (428,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-8 Specifications
& Wheel alignment
Item
Legacy
Outback
2.5 L non-turbo models Except 2.5 L non-turbo models
Toe Front
0+0.12 in (0+3 mm)
Toe angle (sum of both wheels): 08+0815’
Rear
0+0.12 in (0+3 mm)
Toe angle (sum of both wheels): 08+0815’
0.08+0.12 in (2+3 mm)
Toe angle (sum of both wheels):
0810’+0815’
Camber*
Front −0830’+0845’ −0815’+0845’ 0800’+0845’
Rear −1800’+0845’ −1810’+0845’
0800’+0845’
*: The difference between right-hand camber and left-hand camber should be within 45’ or less.
Black plate (429,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 15A
. Trailer hitch connector
2 20A
. Rear power window
(left side)
3 20A
. Power window (driver’s
side)
4 7.5A
. Navigation system
. Front wiper deicer
. Moonroof
5 7.5A
. Combination meter
6 7.5A
. Remote control rear
view mirrors
7 7.5A
. Integrated unit
8 15A
. Stop light
9 15A
. Seat heater relay
10 7.5A
. Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A
. Turn signal unit
12 15A
. Integrated unit
. Automatic transmission
unit
Specifications
12-9
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (430,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-10 Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
13 20A
. Socket
14 Empty
15 20A
. Rear power window
(right side)
16 Empty
17 15A
. Front wiper deicer
18 7.5A
. Back-up light
19 7.5A
. Electronic parking
brake unit
. Hill Holder system unit
20 10A
. Accessory power outlet
21 7.5A
. Starter relay
22 15A
. Air conditioner
23 Empty
24 15A
. Audio
. Navigation system
25 15A
. SRS airbag system
26 7.5A
. Main fan
27 30A
. Power window relay
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
28 Empty
29 20A
. Power window
(passenger’s side)
30 Empty
31 7.5A
. Automatic air condi-
tioner unit
32 Empty
33 7.5A
. ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
. Power steering
Black plate (431,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 7.5A
. CVT control unit
2 7.5A
. Horn LO
3 7.5A
. Horn HI
4 15A
. Low beam headlight
(right side)
5 15A
. Low beam headlight
(left side)
6 20A
. Fuel pump
7 10A
. High beam headlight
(left side)
8 10A
. High beam headlight
(right side)
9 20A
. Continuously variable
transmission control
unit
10 7.5A
. Alternator
11 20A
. Moonroof
12 7.5A
. Engine control unit
Specifications
12-11
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (432,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-12 Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
13 15A
. Engine control unit
14 15A
. Ignition coil
15 15A
. Engine control unit
16 15A
. Engine control unit
17 15A
. Automatic transmission
control unit
18 10A
. Illumination
19 10A
. Rear combination light
20 15A
. Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher (body control
unit)
21 20A
. Door lock (body control
unit)
22 15A
. Rear wiper
. Rear washer
23 10A
. Front washer
24 30A
. Front wiper
25 25A
. Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
. Front wiper deicer
26 15A
. Blower fan
27 15A
. Blower fan
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
28 25A
. Audio unit
29 25A
. Sub fan
30 25A
. Main fan
31 30A
. ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
32 10A
. Fog light (right side)
33 10A
. Fog light (left side)
34 10A
. Back-up (body control
unit)
Black plate (433,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Specifications 12-13
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (434,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-14 Specifications
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 (9005)
2) Front position light 12V-5W W5W
3) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7
4) Front turn signal light 12V-21W W21W
5) Map light 12V-8W
6) Dome light 12V-8W
7) Door step light 12V-5W W5W
8) Front fog light 12V-55W H11
9) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W
10) Vanity mirror light 14V-1.4W HTU
11) Cargo area light 12V-13W
12) Back-up light (Outback) 12V-16W W16W (921)
13) Tail light (Outback) 12V-5W W5W
14) Licence plate light (Outback)
12V-5W W5W
15)
Rear turn signal light (Outback)
12V-21W WY21W
Black plate (435,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Wattage Bulb No.
16) Brake light (Outback)
12V-21W W21W
17) Tail and rear side marker light
(Outback)
12V-5W W5W
18) Trunk light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W
19) Tail light (Legacy) 12V-5W W21/5W
20)
Brake/Tail and rear side marker light
(Legacy)
12V-21/5W W21/5W
21)
License plate light (Legacy) 12V-5W
W5W
22)
Back-up light (Legacy) 12V-16W
921
23)
Rear turn signal light (Legacy) 12V-21W
WY21W
A) High mount stop light (Outback) ––
B)
High mount stop light (Legacy) –
–
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications 12-15
12
Black plate (436,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
12-16 Specifications
Vehicle identification
1) Emission control label
2) Vehicle identification number
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load
capacities ...................................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (440,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
tions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
Black plate (441,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or othe rwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufacturer ’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire m ay be
inf lated. F or example, “350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (442,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction typ e
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in t he plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14
.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “Tires” F12-7
.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
Black plate (443,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adv erse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper in-
flation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure out-
doors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (444,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of t he tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corres ponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mount-
ing on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Max imum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
Black plate (445,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls o f an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance betwee n rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (446,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
pound from the cord material in the
sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Black plate (447,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead t o an
accident.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (448,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Rotating the tires involves switch-
ing the front and rear tires on the
right-hand side of the vehicle and
similarly switching the front and
rear tires on the left-hand side of
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept
on its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the wheel
nuts are correctly tightened. For
information about the tightening
torque and tightening sequence
for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat
tires” F9-6
.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown o n the
vehicle placard attached to the
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
Thevehicleplacardalsoshows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to “Trailer tow-
ing” F8-19
.
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seat ing con-
figurations
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the followi ng
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
Black plate (449,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (450,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
Black plate (451,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and f ront and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear
that will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weigh t of occupant s and
cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passenger s from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (452,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
available amount of cargo a nd
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capa-
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
perature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Requir e-
ments in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
Black plate (453,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car t ires mu st me et under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possi-
ble tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which coul d cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (454,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 21
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
14-2 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-25
Warning light ................................................. 3-16, 7-26
Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-48
Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-19
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control system ............................. 4-12
Manual climate control system ................................... 4-7
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-15
Airflow selection........................................................... 4-2
Automatic climate control system ....................... 4-2, 4-12
Manual climate control system ............................. 4-2, 4-5
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-15
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-20
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-40
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-25
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-16
Armrest..................................................................... 1-12
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-12
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-15
Audio
Antenna system....................................................... 5-2
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-28
CD player operation ............................................... 5-18
Control button........................................................ 5-31
FM/AM radio operation ............................................. 5-9
Power and sound controls......................................... 5-6
Satellite radio operations......................................... 5-13
Set ........................................................................ 5-3
Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-28
Sensor .................................................................. 3-28
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ..................... 3-36, 3-44, 3-45
Automatic climate control system................................... 4-8
Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers ...................... 3-32
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-18
Fluid ........................................................... 11-24, 12-6
Manual mode......................................................... 7-22
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-15
Select lever ........................................................... 7-19
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-20
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-14
Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-28
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-45
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-6
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-14
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-11
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-24
Booster ....................................................... 7-24, 11-30
Fluid ........................................................... 11-28, 12-6
Pad and lining...................................................... 11-32
Parking ................................................................. 7-34
Pedal .................................................................. 11-31
System.................................................................. 7-24
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
Brake pedal
Free play ............................................................. 11-31
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-31
Brake system ............................................................ 7-24
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17
Braking..................................................................... 7-24
Tips...................................................................... 7-24
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-32
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-13
Replacing............................................................. 11-48
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-15
Light....................................................................... 6-3
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-17
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-6
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3
Changing
Coolant................................................................ 11-17
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-14
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-14
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
lamp...................................................................... 3-12
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-31
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-31
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-31
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-32
Coolant level........................................................ 11-17
Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid).................. 11-24
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-28
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-29
Fluid level (power steering fluid) .. ........................... 11-27
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-40
Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-12
Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-26
Oil level (manual transmission oil) .......................... 11-23
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-32
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-28
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-36
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-20
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light ..................................................................... 3-27
Seatbelt......................................................... 1-14, 3-10
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-14
Climate control system
Automatic ............................................................... 4-8
Manual................................................................... 4-4
Clock ........................................................................ 3-24
Clutch
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
14-4 Index
Fluid............................................................ 11-29, 12-6
Pedal .................................................................. 11-31
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13
Compass .................................................. 3-36, 3-44, 3-45
Continuously variable transmission............................... 7-18
Fluid............................................................ 11-25, 12-6
Manual mode ........................................................ 7-22
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-15
Select lever ........................................................... 7-19
Shift lock function................................................... 7-20
Coolant............................................................ 11-17, 12-6
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-13
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-13
Cooling system......................................................... 11-16
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Crossbars ................................................................. 8-14
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-38
Indicator light................................................. 3-23, 7-41
Set indicator light ........................................... 3-23, 7-42
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-8
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-9
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-9
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-29
Defogger................................................................... 3-34
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-34
Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................... 11-26, 12-5
Rear............................................................ 11-27, 12-5
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-18
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-25
Dome light......................................................... 6-2, 11-56
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-4
Open indicator light................................................. 3-20
Open warning light.................................................. 3-20
Step light............................................................. 11-58
Double trip meter......................................................... 3-6
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-22
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-20
AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 7
Drinking..................................................................... 6
Drugs........................................................................ 7
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Pets.......................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-9
Tips ................................................. 7-17, 7-23, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
Winter .................................................................... 8-8
E
ECO gauge ................................................................ 3-8
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-7
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-18, 7-27
Electronic parking brake .............................................. 7-34
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ......... 7-35
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-35
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
Warning ........................................................ 3-19, 7-37
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-14
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9
Coolant........................................................ 11-17, 12-6
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-7
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-14
Oil............................................................... 11-12, 12-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-12
Starting................................................................... 7-8
Stopping ............................................................... 7-10
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-14
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .......................................... 11-24
Brake .................................................................. 11-28
Clutch.................................................................. 11-29
Power steering ..................................................... 11-27
Fog light
Bulb .................................................................... 11-51
Indicator light......................................................... 3-24
Switch .................................................................. 3-30
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-26, 12-5
Fog light ...................................................... 3-30, 11-51
Fog light indicator light............................................ 3-24
Position light......................................................... 11-51
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-22
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-51
Front fog light........................................................... 11-51
Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-6
Power seat ............................................................. 1-4
Reclining ................................................................ 1-3
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3
Gauge.................................................................... 3-7
Requirements ................................................. 7-2, 12-3
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-46
Main fuse ............................................................ 11-48
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-9
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Glove box................................................................... 6-6
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13
H
Hands-free system...................................................... 5-32
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-5, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat............................................................... 1-6
Rear seat .............................................................. 1-10
Headlight......................................................... 3-28, 11-48
Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-13
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
14-6 Index
Control switch........................................................ 3-27
Flasher ................................................................. 3-29
Indicator light......................................................... 3-24
Heater operation (manual climate control system) ............ 4-6
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-23
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-28
Hill Holder................................................................. 7-35
Indicator light................................................. 3-19, 7-36
Switch .................................................................. 7-36
HomeLink
®
........................................................ 3-36, 3-45
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13
Convenient tie-down............................................... 6-17
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13
Horn......................................................................... 3-52
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-17
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3
Light....................................................................... 3-4
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-30
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light) ................. 2-4, 3-22
Indicator light
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-13
Cruise control ................................................ 3-23, 7-41
Cruise control set........................................... 3-23, 7-42
Door open............................................................. 3-20
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-24
Headlight .............................................................. 3-24
High beam............................................................. 3-23
Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-22
Security.......................................................... 2-4, 3-22
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-22
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF......................... 3-22, 7-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-21, 7-30
Inside mirror ............................................. 3-36, 3-44, 3-45
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-25
J
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
K
Key............................................................................ 2-2
Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4
Replacement........................................................... 2-4
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-8
L
Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
License plate light..................................................... 11-55
Light
Back-up (Legacy) ................................................. 11-52
Brake (Outback) ................................................... 11-53
Brake (Station wagon)........................................... 11-53
Brake/Tail (Sedan) ................................................ 11-52
Brake/Tail and rear side marker (Legacy)................. 11-52
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-58
Control switch........................................................ 3-27
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-56
Door step............................................................. 11-58
Front fog...................................................... 3-30, 11-51
Front position ....................................................... 11-51
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4
License plate........................................................ 11-55
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-57
Rear combination.................................................. 11-52
Rear turn signal (Sedan) ........................................ 11-52
Rear turn signal (Station wagon) ............................. 11-53
Tail and rear side marker (Outback)......................... 11-53
Tail light (Station wagon)........................................ 11-53
Tail/Back-up (Outback)........................................... 11-54
Trunk................................................................... 11-58
Turn signal ......................................... 3-29, 11-51, 11-52
Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-57
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12
Low fuel warning light ........................................... 3-8, 3-19
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-15
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-33
Lubricants ................................................................. 12-4
M
Main fuse................................................................. 11-48
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-22
Tips...................................................................... 11-5
Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-12
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-4
Mode .................................................................... 7-22
Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Transmission ......................................................... 7-16
Transmission oil ........................................... 11-23, 12-5
Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-57
Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-5
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-34
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-36
Moonroof........................................................... 2-28, 9-19
Multi function display................................................... 3-25
N
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer ................................................................... 3-6
Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Oil filter ................................................................... 11-14
Oil level
Engine ................................................................ 11-12
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-26
Manual transmission ............................................. 11-23
Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-27
Warning light.......................................................... 3-14
Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-14
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
14-8 Index
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-34
Mirrors.................................................................. 3-51
Overhead console........................................................ 6-8
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12
P
Parking..................................................................... 7-34
Brake ................................................................... 7-34
Tips...................................................................... 7-37
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-2
Pocket ........................................................................ 6-8
Power
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-7
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-51
Seat ....................................................................... 1-4
Steering................................................................ 7-23
Steering fluid ................................................ 11-27, 12-6
Windows............................................................... 2-20
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-25, 1-67
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7
Printed antenna ........................................................... 5-2
R
Rear
Combination lights................................................. 11-52
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-27, 12-5
Gate............................................................. 2-26, 9-19
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-52
Rear seat.................................................................... 1-7
Folding down .......................................................... 1-9
Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-10
Reclining ................................................................ 1-8
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-18
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................... 3-34
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-34
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-43
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid........................... 11-25, 12-6
Brake fluid ................................................... 11-29, 12-6
Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-30, 12-6
Engine oil .................................................... 11-16, 12-4
Front differential gear oil................................ 11-26, 12-5
Manual transmission oil................................. 11-24, 12-5
Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-28, 12-6
Rear differential gear oil ................................ 11-27, 12-5
Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-7
Refueling.................................................................... 7-3
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-10
Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-8
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-32
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-41
Replacing
Air cleaner element............................................... 11-20
Battery (remote engine start transmitter) .................... 7-14
Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................... 2-11
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-12
Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 11-48
Back-up light (Legacy) .......................................... 11-52
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
Brake light (Outback)............................................. 11-53
Brake light (Station wagon) .................................... 11-53
Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Legacy) .......... 11-52
Brake/Tail light (Sedan).......................................... 11-52
Cargo area light.................................................... 11-58
Dome light ........................................................... 11-56
Door step light ...................................................... 11-58
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-51
Front position light................................................. 11-51
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-51
Headlight ............................................................. 11-48
License plate light ................................................. 11-55
Map light.............................................................. 11-57
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-52
Rear turn signal light (Sedan) ................................. 11-52
Rear turn signal light (Station wagon) ...................... 11-53
Tail and rear side marker light (Outback).................. 11-53
Tail light (Station wagon)........................................ 11-53
Tail/Back-up light (Outback).................................... 11-54
Trunk light............................................................ 11-58
Vanity mirror light .................................................. 11-57
Rocking the vehicle.................................................... 8-11
Roof rails with integrated cross bars............................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4
Symbol ...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric................................................................... 10-5
Front...................................................................... 1-2
Heater.................................................................... 1-6
Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Power .................................................................... 1-4
Rear ...................................................................... 1-7
Seatbelt................................................................. 4, 1-12
Fastening .............................................................. 1-15
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-22
Pretensioners......................................................... 1-22
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-12
Warning light and chime .................................. 1-14, 3-10
Security
Alarm system......................................................... 2-15
ID plate .................................................................. 2-3
Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light .................................................. 2-4, 3-22
Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-19
Security indicator light ................................................. 3-22
Select lever ............................................................... 7-19
Position indicator .................................................... 3-22
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-20
Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-19
Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13
Snow tires ....................................................... 8-10, 11-33
Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-22, 12-7
Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Speedometer .............................................................. 3-6
SRS
Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-54
Index 14-9
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
14-10 Index
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-43
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-54
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-38
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-65
Servicing............................................................... 1-66
Warning light ......................................................... 3-11
Starting the engine....................................................... 7-8
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-6
Steering wheel
Power................................................................... 7-23
Tilt/telescopic......................................................... 3-52
Stopping the engine ................................................... 7-10
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-29
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-38
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5
T
Tachometer ................................................................. 3-7
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-15
Coolant................................................................. 3-13
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-33, 1-36
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-13
Tire ................................................................. 11-33, 12-7
Chains.................................................................. 8-11
Inspection ............................................................ 11-35
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-35
Replacement........................................................ 11-39
Rotation .............................................................. 11-38
Size and pressure .................................................. 12-7
Types.................................................................. 11-33
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-32, 9-9, 11-33
Warning light.......................................................... 3-15
Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-33
Tools.......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-33, 1-36
Towing ...................................................................... 9-12
All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-15
Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-15
Hooks ................................................................... 9-13
Weight .................................................................. 8-19
Trailer
Connecting ............................................................ 8-17
Hitch............................................................. 8-16, 8-22
Towing .................................................................. 8-19
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-24
Trip meter................................................................... 3-6
Trunk lid ............................................................ 2-24, 9-18
Release handle ...................................................... 2-25
Trunk light ............................................................... 11-58
Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-23
Lever .................................................................... 3-29
U
Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-18
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 15
V
Valet mode................................................................ 2-18
Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-5, 11-57
Light.................................................................... 11-57
Vehicle
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13
Identification ........................................................ 12-16
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light.......................................... 3-22, 7-31
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-31
Operation indicator light .................................. 3-20, 7-30
System ................................................................. 7-28
Warning light ................................................. 3-20, 7-30
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9
Warning chimes
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-14, 3-10
Warning light
ABS ............................................................. 3-16, 7-26
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-20
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-15
Brake system ........................................................ 3-17
Charge ................................................................. 3-14
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-12
Coolant temperature high........................................ 3-13
Door open............................................................. 3-20
Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-14
Low fuel ......................................................... 3-8, 3-19
Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-15
Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-14
Seatbelt......................................................... 1-14, 3-10
SRS airbag system................................................. 3-11
Vehicle Dynamics Control................................ 3-20, 7-30
Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-20
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-19
Washing .................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing.................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-37
Wheel
Alignment .............................................................. 12-8
Aluminum ............................................................ 11-40
Balance............................................................... 11-37
Nut tightening torque........................................ 9-6, 12-7
Replacement........................................................ 11-39
Windows ................................................................... 2-20
Windshield
Washer fluid......................................................... 11-40
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-32
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-42
Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-34
Winter
Driving ................................................................... 8-8
Tires ........................................................... 8-10, 11-33
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-31
Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-34
Index 14-11
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A2470BE-B" EDITED: 2010/ 9/ 14
GAS STATION REFERENCE
&
Fuel:
! Non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or
higher.
! Turbo models
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93
AKI or higher.
If 93 AKI fuel is not readily available in your area, refer to “Fuel
requirements” F7-2.
& Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” F7-2.
& Fuel capacity:
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
Use only the following oils.
. API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
& Engine oil capacity:
2.5 L non-turbo models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo models: 4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
3.6 L models: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-12.
& Cold tire pressure:
Refer to “Tires” F12-7.
